JP2019098077A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To appropriately change a state of a game element according to settings while enhancing amusement properties.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: setting change control means capable of setting a setting value based on a predetermined operation; lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition; display means in which a variable display of a symbol is executed in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time; variation pattern determination means for determining the variation patterns executed in the display means based on a result of the lottery; variation pattern table storage means for storing a variation pattern table used for the determination of the variation pattern; and symbol display control means for executing a variable display of a symbol over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means and executing a stop display in a mode indicating the result of the lottery. The variation pattern table storage means stores a variation pattern table which is stipulated so that the probability at which the variation time is determined to be a relatively short variation pattern becomes higher as the set setting value becomes higher.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 14

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in the starting opening, a lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the big hit game is over when the above big hit is a certainty big hit, it is controlled to the high probability gaming state.

  As this type of game machine, the game setting value in which the state of the game element (structural element or control element) affecting the ball entering rate to the ball entrance and the ball withdrawal tendency is inputted in advance by a predetermined setting input means The pachinko game machine set to the state corresponding to is disclosed (for example, refer to patent documents 1).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, since it is possible to arbitrarily set the payout tendency for each gaming machine, even if it becomes impossible to adjust or maintain the gaming board configuration such as gaming nails and features, etc., It is possible to prevent the uniformity of the payout tendency for each game arcade or game arcade.

Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-065977

  However, according to the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency for each game console, a structural element or control element that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entry port and the withdrawal tendency. It is possible to change the state of in accordance with the set value, and the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game interest is not necessarily large.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest. is there.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118);
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) in which variation display of symbols (for example, special symbols) is performed in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time;
Variation pattern determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S78) that determines the variation pattern performed in the display unit based on the result of the lottery;
Variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a variation pattern table to be used for determination of the variation pattern;
A symbol display control means (for performing variation display of the symbol (for example, a variation display of a special symbol) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means, and stopping and displaying in a manner indicating the result of the lottery For example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S93;
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, a diagram shown in FIG. 6) is defined such that the probability that the fluctuation time is determined relatively to the short fluctuation pattern (for example, the normal fluctuation B) becomes higher as the setting value set by the setting change control means becomes higher. It is characterized in that it stores the special symbol variation time determination table shown in 12).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, so the higher the set value, the more the number of times of drawing per unit time will increase. The degree of expectation is enhanced, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
While further comprising lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of times of execution of the lottery from a specific time,
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
Another fluctuation pattern table (for example, FIG. 14) is defined such that the probability that the short fluctuation pattern is determined as the setting value set by the setting change control unit becomes higher than the fluctuation pattern table. It further stores the variation time determination table table for special symbols when the number of variations shown is 1001 or more,
The fluctuation pattern determination means
When the number of times of execution of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a big hit lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the big hit gaming state is ended), The variation pattern may be determined using the other variation pattern table.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the number of times of lottery execution counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation pattern can be determined using another fluctuation pattern table Therefore, the higher the setting value, the more the number of times of drawing per unit time becomes remarkable, and the number of times of executing the drawing is a specific number of times of execution. The “predetermined condition” corresponds to, for example, when a big hit lottery of a predetermined or more (for example, 1001 times or more) special symbol is performed after the big hit gaming state ends, but it is not limited thereto.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the variation display of the symbol is being performed, the lottery of the variation display of the symbol is performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls so that the game can not proceed even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a result;
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when variation display of symbols (for example, variation display of special symbols) is being performed, it is determined whether the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. There is something to be done. In this case, even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbol, if it is determined that it is not suitable in the determination of the appropriate / not appropriate for the game information, It is configured not to progress the game. This makes it possible to secure security.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably change the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the interest.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is an example of the disassembled perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from a back side. It is an example of the front view which shows the external appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the external appearance perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the front disassembled perspective view which looked at the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from diagonally right upper. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. It is an example of the block diagram which shows a main control circuit. It is a figure showing a functional flow of a pachinko game machine concerning one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table which shows the probability of the big hit of the pachinko game machine 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows an example about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit judgment of a special symbol is a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows an example of the decoration symbol determination table memorize | stored in program ROM of a sub control circuit. It is a figure which shows the other example of the fluctuation time determination table of the special symbol memorize | stored in main ROM. It is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit judgment of a special symbol is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit judgment of a special symbol is a big hit. It is an example of a decoration symbol determination table stored in program ROM of a sub control circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power activation process by main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of power activation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game permission processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a backup clear process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game return processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing at the time of abnormality. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing at the time of a power failure generation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection process by main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of starting opening winning a prize detection processing by main CPU. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of setting check processing by the main CPU 101; It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control main processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check process by main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management process by main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of time reduction processing by the main CPU. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end interval processing by the main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern table setting process by main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the normal symbol control processing by main CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main process by sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis process by sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command transmission process by sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message setting process by sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process by sub CPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message transmission process by sub CPU. It is a table which shows an example of the selection rate of the number of times of the limiter in the pachinko machine of expansion example 1 for every setting value. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect through which a game ball passes an accessory continuous operation | use right gate. It is a figure which shows an example of the aspect through which a game ball passes an accessory continuous operation left gate.

[1. Configuration of gaming machine]
[1-1. Appearance configuration]
First, the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described using FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1: is an example of the perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 2: is an example of a disassembled perspective view which shows the external appearance in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 3: is an example of the perspective view which shows the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention from a back side. FIG. 4 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an example showing an external appearance perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is an example showing a disassembled perspective view of a game board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front and diagonally above. FIG. 7: is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit containing a 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. Further, the directions shown in the drawings are directions in front view. Therefore, for example, “left” is described in the right direction in the drawing because the drawing is a rear view, “right” in the drawing is “left” in the front view. Similarly, for those described as “right” in the left direction of the drawing, “left” in the drawing is “right” in front view for the same reason.

  In the following description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side, unless otherwise specified. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left hand side is defined as the left side, and the right hand side is defined as the right side. Furthermore, the front is the side visible when viewed from the player side, and the back is the side visible when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 6, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a crate 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launcher 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board unit 17, a payout unit 18, And the substrate unit 19 is provided.

  The wooden frame 11 is a substantially rectangular frame in a front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the board unit 19 on the back side, and the glass door 13, the plate unit 14, the launcher 15, the liquid crystal display device 16 and the game board unit 17 on the front side. Support.

  The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be able to open and close. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. In the opening 22 of the glass door 13, a protective glass 23 having transparency is disposed. The protective glass 23 is disposed to face the game board unit 17 described later in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are disposed on the top of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 performs, for example, notification by sound, presentation, error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 performs, for example, notification with light, effects and the like.

  The tray unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper tray 26 and the lower tray 27 are integrated. The tray unit 14 is disposed at the front lower portion of the base door 12 below the glass door 13.

  The upper tray 26 stores gaming balls, and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 26 are fired from the launch device 15 toward the later-described gaming area 20. The upper tray 26 is provided with a payout opening 61 and an effect button 62. The game balls to be lent out or the game balls to be paid out as the prize balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper tray 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANCE button", a "push button" or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

  The lower tray 27 is mainly for storing game balls overflowing from the upper tray 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a discharge port 63. The gaming balls overflowing from the upper tray 26 are dispensed from the payout opening 63 to the lower tray 27.

  The launcher 15 is for launching the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 26 toward the gaming area 20. The launcher 15 is disposed at the front lower right of the base door 12 and at the lower right of the pan unit 14. The launcher 15 comprises a panel body 31, a drive (not shown) and a launch handle 32.

  The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the pan unit 14 in the launcher 15. The firing handle 32 is disposed on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is disposed on the back surface side of the panel body 31 and is configured by, for example, a firing solenoid (not shown). Thus, in the launch device 15, when the launch handle 32 is operated by the player, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device according to the operation.

  The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol (hereinafter, the big hit determination of the special symbol may be simply referred to as "big hit determination") or various effect images relating to the game. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an identification pattern for decoration (decorative pattern), an effect image according to the result of the big hit determination, a effect image during a big hit, a demonstration effect image, It includes the number of pending etc. of the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is disposed approximately at the center of the game board unit 17 (inner peripheral side of a center rail 1742 described later).

  In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided to display the above various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided, and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. It may be displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control board 30 having a main control circuit 100, a sub control board 40 having a sub control circuit 200, and payout / launch of gaming balls. A power supply unit 60 having a discharge / discharge control board 50 having a discharge / discharge control circuit 300 (refer to FIG. 8 described later) to control and a power supply circuit 338 (refer to FIG. 8 described later) supplying power 35 and a backup clear switch 330 (see FIG. 8 described later) are provided.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of set values (six steps of “1” to “6” in the present embodiment) in which various data related to the pachinko game are different. The setting "6" is most advantageous to the player, and as the set value becomes smaller, the player's advantage also gradually decreases.

  In the main board case accommodating the main control board 30, a setting switch 332 operated when changing the setting value, a setting key 328 operated when changing or confirming the setting value, a performance display monitor And an error notification monitor 336 (both of which are described later with reference to FIG. 8). For example, performance display data to be described later is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. For example, an error code described later is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. The setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 are accommodated in the main control board case, in consideration of security, the person in charge of managing the pachinko gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "person in charge of managing the gaming machine"). ) To prevent the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 from being easily accessed. In the main board case, in addition to the ones in which the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328 can not be accessed unless the main board case is opened exactly, only the setting board 332 corresponding to the main board case and the setting key 328 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine manager and there is a notch, the gaming machine management It also includes those in which the person in charge is allowed to access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

  The game board unit 17 is disposed in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 is formed in which the rolled game balls can roll down.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the gaming board unit 17 is disposed at a substantially central portion of the gaming area 20, and a transparent panel 172 on which the gaming area 20 where the ejected gaming balls can roll down is formed. A center unit 174, a normal motorized accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passing gate 49, and a back unit 176 are provided. The center unit 174, the normal motorized accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172.

  In the transparent panel 172, an opening 1722 is formed in a portion where a display region of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is disposed. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 6, on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, a guide rail 26 is provided and a game nail or the like is implanted. The game ball fired from the launch device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, and flows down toward the lower side of the game area 20 while changing the traveling direction.

  The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-like members (hereinafter referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The play area 20 is divided by the guide rails 26. The inner rail 26 b is for guiding the fired game ball to the upper part of the game area 20 together with the outer rail 26 a. The inner rail 26 b is disposed on the left side of the transparent panel 172 inside the outer rail 26 a.

  The center unit 174 includes a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape in a front view. The center rail 1742 is disposed at the top of the game area 20 and divides the flow-down area of the game balls in the game area 20 into the left and right of the center rail 1742.

  The game balls fired by the launch device 15 are divided into the left and right of the center rail 1742 and flow down the game area 20, and the game balls flow down the game area 20 are planted on the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with a game nail or the like installed, it flows downward while changing the traveling direction. The game balls that have been fired are distributed into the flow-down area in accordance with the amount of operation of the launch handle 52. Specifically, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is small, the launched gaming ball flows down the left side area of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the operation amount of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched gaming ball flows down the right side area of the center rail 1742. In addition, how to hit the game ball in the left area of the center rail 1742 is called so-called "left-hand", and how it is allowed to flow the game ball in the right area of the center rail 1742 is referred to as so-called "right-handed" It can be separated by the player.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting opening 420, the big winning opening 540, and the special electric symbol 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed at the lower right of the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

  The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is disposed in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 8). When the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening 540, the gaming ball that has won the prize is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 47 to the upper tray 42 (or from the payout outlet 48 to the lower tray 44).

  The special motorized prize 600 includes a shutter 610 which can be advanced and retracted in the front-rear direction, and a big winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 8) which drives the shutter 610. Special motorized role 600 is disposed above large winning opening 540. The special electric role 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) winning of the gaming ball to the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and to the large winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by the special electric role 600 (shutter 610) is shifted to the big hit gaming state based on the result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins in the first starting port 420 or the second starting port 440 described later. It is done when it is done. In the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74, the special symbol is displayed as a result of the big hit determination performed when the game ball wins the first start port 420 or a second start port 440 described later. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

  In addition, in this specification, when only calling it a "special symbol", both a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol shall be meant. However, although the number of special symbols is two (a first special symbol, a second special symbol) in the present embodiment, the number of special symbols may be one.

  The first start port 420 triggers a big hit determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and causes the liquid crystal display 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73 described later to display the result of the big hit determination. Give. A first start port switch 421 is disposed in the first start port 420 (see FIG. 8). When the gaming ball wins in the first starting opening 420, the winning gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421. When a game ball is detected in the first start opening switch 421, a jackpot determination is performed in the interior (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 8) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a preset number of game balls are output from the payout opening 61. It is discharged (discharged) to the upper tray 26 or from the discharge outlet 63 to the lower tray 27. In addition, the winning of the game ball to the first start opening 420 is performed by hitting the left.

  The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450 and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric character combination unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left of the game area 20. The second start port 440 and the out port 450 are disposed adjacent to each other, and the second start port 440 is disposed on the right side in a front view and the out port 450 is disposed on the left side in a front view. Conventionally, there are many cases where the ordinary motor-operated service unit 400 is disposed, for example, below the first start port 420. However, in recent years, it has been required to further increase the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and it has become difficult to arrange the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first start port 420. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the normal motorized prize unit 400 is disposed substantially at the lower left portion of the game area 20.

  The second starting port 440 triggers a big hit determination on condition that a game ball is won (passed), and causes the liquid crystal display 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74 described later to display the result of the big hit determination. Give. The second start port switch 441 is disposed in the second start port 440 (see FIG. 8). When the game ball is won in the second starting opening 440, the game ball that has won the prize is detected by the second starting opening switch 441. When a game ball is detected in the second start opening switch 441, a jackpot determination is performed in the interior (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 6) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Are discharged (discharged) to the lower plate 27 from the upper plate or from the discharge port 63. The second starting port 440 is determined to have difficulty in winning by the ordinary motorized part 460. In addition, winning of the game ball to the 2nd starting opening 440 is done by the right hitting in principle.

  The ordinary electric part 460, which will be described in detail later, has a blade member 4620 rotatable to the right, a starting port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50) and the power of the starting port solenoid 4630 as a wing member 4620. Power transmission mechanism 4640 (see, for example, FIG. 49 and FIG. 50) transmitting to the vehicle. The ordinary electric utility 460 can be shifted (driven) between the open state where passage of the game ball is easy and the closed state where passage of the game ball is difficult by driving the wing member 4620 by the start opening solenoid 4630. Configured When the gaming ball passes above the wing member 4620 while the wing member 4620 is being driven, the gaming ball wins the second start port 440 or is discharged from the out port 450 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Be done. The opening and closing drive by the normal motorized combination 460 (feather members 4620) is performed for a predetermined period and the number of times when the normal symbol in the normal symbol display section 71 becomes a specific stop display mode.

  The pass gate 49 gives an opportunity for normal symbol determination on condition that a game ball has won (pass). The passage gate 49 is disposed on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. A passing gate switch 49a is disposed in the passing gate 49 (see FIG. 8). When the gaming ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing gaming switch is detected by the passing gaming switch 49a. When a game ball is detected in the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 is performed by hitting the right.

  The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which the first starting opening 420, the big winning opening 540, and the special electric symbol 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is disposed substantially at the lower right of the game area 20. In recent years, it has been required that the liquid crystal display device 16 be made larger in size so that the attacker unit 500 is disposed at the lower right of the game area 20, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are disposed in the game area 20. The reason is that it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged liquid crystal display device 16.

  The big winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a big hit gaming state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is disposed in the special winning opening 540 (see FIG. 8). When the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening 540, the gaming ball that has won the prize is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout opening 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower tray 27).

  The special motorized prize 600 includes a shutter 610 which can be advanced and retracted in the front-rear direction, and a big winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 8) which drives the shutter 610. Special motorized role 600 is disposed above large winning opening 540. The special electric role 600 has an open state that enables (or facilitates) winning of the gaming ball to the large winning opening 540 by driving the shutter 610 by the large winning opening solenoid 620, and to the large winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state where it is impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The opening drive by special electric character 600 (shutter 610) is a special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 73 or the second special symbol display section 74 as a specific stop display mode, and is shifted to the big hit gaming state To be done.

  The general winning openings 53, 54, 55 are disposed at the lower left portion of the gaming board unit 17, and the general winning openings 56 are disposed at the lower right portion of the gaming board unit 17. Further, general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a and 56a are disposed in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 and 56 (see FIG. 8). When the gaming ball has won in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning ball is detected by the general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When a game ball is detected in the general winning opening switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout opening 61 to the upper tray 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower tray 27) (Discharged).

  In the present embodiment, the number of winning balls in the first start opening 420 and the second starting opening 440 is 3, the number of winning balls in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, 56 is 10, and the large winning opening 540 The number of winning balls is set to 15 each. This value (the number of winning balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

  The out port 57 is disposed at the central lowermost portion (the most downstream position in the flow-down direction of the game ball) of the game area 20. The out port 57 is finally flowed in when the fired game ball does not win any of the start port and the winning port.

  The LED unit 70 is disposed at the lower right portion of the game board unit 17 and outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 includes, as the various display units, an ordinary symbol display unit 71, an ordinary symbol suspension display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special A symbol holding display unit 75 and a second special symbol holding display unit 76 are provided.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (normal symbol determination) on the normal symbol game. Here, the normal symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not the normal motorized role product 460 is driven to be in the open state based on the result of determination (normal symbol determination). The normal symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the start condition of the variable display (variable display) is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variable display of alternately turning on and off. The combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the display LEDs 71a and 71b is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of determination (normal symbol determination) is hit (hereinafter referred to as "normal hit"), the combination of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (normal symbol) turns on and off in a specific stop display mode. Thus, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal motorized utility 460 is in the open state, the normal motorized utility 460 is driven to open and close in the predetermined pattern, and the second starting opening The winning difficulty of the game ball to 440 is changed.

  The normal symbol holding display unit 72 displays the number of times the variable display of the normal symbol held is held (hereinafter, referred to as “the number of holdings of the normal symbol fluctuation display”). The normal symbol holding display unit 72 includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The normal symbol holding display unit 72 displays the number of holdings of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. In addition, when execution of fluctuation indication of normal design is suspended for 2 times, while indicator LED 72a lights up, indicator LED 72b lights up. In addition, when execution of fluctuation indication of normal design is suspended for 3 times, while indicator LED 72a blinks, indicator LED 72b lights. In addition, when execution of fluctuation indication of normal design is suspended for 4 times, while indicator LED 72a blinks, indicator LED 72b blinks.

  The first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74 display the result of determination (big hit determination) on the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined according to the result of the determination (big hit determination).

  The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs variable display triggered by winning (start winning) of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 420, and displays the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the gaming ball. When the variable display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variable display in which eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 73a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting variable display.

  When the result of the big hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is a big hit, the combination (special symbol) of lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a becomes a specific stop display mode . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming ball can be won in the big winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is referred to as a first special symbol.

  The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a consisting of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs variable display triggered by winning (start winning) of the gaming ball in the second starting opening 440, and displays the result of the jackpot determination based on the winning of the gaming ball. When the variable display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variable display in which eight LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off. In the display LED group 74a, a combination (display pattern) by turning on and off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs stop display after a predetermined period has elapsed after starting variable display.

  If the result of the big hit determination based on the game ball winning to the second starting opening 440 is a big hit, the combination (special symbol) of the lighting and extinguishing of the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a will be a specific stop display mode . Thus, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the gaming state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the gaming ball can be won in the big winning opening 540 Become. In the following description, the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

  Thus, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the normal The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player is determined. In the present embodiment, the big hit determination includes a big hit determination based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 420 and a big hit determination based on the winning of the gaming ball on the second starting opening 440. That is, if the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, the round game in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is shifted to the big hit game state where the game is executed over a predetermined number of rounds.

  The first special symbol holding display unit 75 and the second special symbol holding display unit 76 execute the number of times of execution of the fluctuation display of the special symbol held (hereinafter referred to as "the number of holdings of the fluctuation display of the special symbol") It is something to display. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol holding display unit 75 and the second special symbol holding display unit 76 display the number of holdings of the variation display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a and 75b and 76a and 76b. The display modes of the display LEDs 75a, 75b and 76a, 76b are the same as the display LEDs 72a, 72b of the normal symbol hold display section 72.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the back unit 176 is provided to decorate the game board unit 17, and includes various prizes such as a top character 1000 disposed at the top of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, an outline of internal processing by the main CPU 101 when the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440 will be described.

  When the gaming ball wins the first starting opening 420, the first starting opening switch 421 detects the winning gaming ball, and the start for the first special symbol based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first special symbol display section 73. Storage is suspended (execution of the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended). With regard to the retention of starting memory for the first special symbol, both the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It is released on the condition that there is no. That is, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 420 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is canceled after the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. When the variable display is not performed for any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 420, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the start memory storage is released, variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 is started.

  When the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 440, the second starting opening switch 441 detects the winning gaming ball, and the starting for the variation display of the second special symbol based on the gaming ball to the second starting opening 440 Storage is suspended (execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended). With regard to the retention of starting memory for the second special symbol, both the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It is released on the condition that there is no. That is, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the suspension of the start memory is canceled after the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed. When the variable display is not performed for any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 440, the suspension of the starting memory is immediately released. When the start memory storage is released, variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 is started.

  In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not simultaneously change. That is, while the variation display of the special symbol is performed on one of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the variation display of the special symbol is not performed on the other display unit. . In the present embodiment, when both the starting memory for the first special symbol and the starting memory for the second special symbol are held, the second special symbol regardless of which starting memory is held first. Priority is given to the release of the suspension of the start memory for the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 73.

  In addition, an upper limit is set for the number of reservations of the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In this embodiment, the number of suspension of the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set as the upper limit to four each. Therefore, the maximum number of holdings of the variation display of the special symbol is eight times the total number of holdings of the variation display of the special symbol due to the winning of the first starting opening 420 and the second starting opening 440.

  In addition, during the fluctuation of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74, the decorative symbol consisting of numerals in the liquid crystal display device 16 changes except in a specific case. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, symbols “1” to “8” are used as the numerals. In addition, the decorative symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 are stopped and displayed while the first or second special symbol being variably displayed in the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74 is stopped. Is displayed. In addition, a decorative symbol is also used as identification information for presentation.

  Also, when the first or second special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display section 73 and the second special symbol display section 74 in the stop display mode is a specific stop display mode, the player is informed that the game is a big hit. The effect image to be displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In the present embodiment, as described later, a plurality of jackpots are provided. Also, the big hit type is set according to the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "main symbol") of the special symbol when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. Thus, the player can recognize the jackpot type in addition to the jackpot. Note that a part of the jackpot type is a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it is difficult for the player to be a big hit and to recognize the big hit type.

[1-2. Electrical configuration]
Next, a control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko gaming machine 1 mainly includes a main control circuit 100 that controls a game, a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game, and a payout / firing control circuit 300. And a power supply circuit 338.

  The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like, and is accommodated in a main substrate case.

  A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the program stored in the main ROM 102.

  The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

  The main RAM 103 has a function of storing values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. Although the main RAM 103 is used as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101 in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can read and write may be used.

  The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information of the special symbol game is stored as start storage. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, a first special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the changing first special symbol is stored as a start memory, and a first upper limit of four times A first special symbol start storage area (1) to a first special symbol start storage area (4) are provided in which information on a special symbol game corresponding to a special symbol is stored as start storage. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, a second special symbol start storage area (0) in which information of a special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol in change is stored as a start memory, and a second special for the upper limit of 4 times A second special symbol start storage area (1) to a second special symbol start storage area (4) are provided in which information on a special symbol game corresponding to a symbol is stored as start storage.

  The main control circuit 100 also includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by supplying power to the main RAM 103 promptly, for example, at power-off (power off).

  Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

  For example, in the main control circuit 100, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, a first special symbol hold display unit 75, A second special symbol holding display unit 76, a starting opening solenoid 4630 for driving the wing members 4620 of the ordinary electric utility product 460, a special winning opening solenoid 620 for driving the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting a signal. The main control circuit 100 also transmits data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of big hits, etc., and a hall computer 700 that manages pachinko gaming machines throughout the hall. The external terminal board 320 to be used is connected.

  Further, to the main control circuit 100, a first start port switch 421, a second start port switch 441, a pass gate switch 49a, a count switch 541, a general winning port switch 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, etc. are connected. . When the gaming ball is detected by these members, the main control circuit 100 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal from the members. In addition, a backup clear switch 330 or the like is connected to the main control circuit 100 to clear backup data at the time of power interruption in accordance with the operation of the game arcade manager.

  Further, a setting key 328 and a setting switch 332 are also connected to the main control circuit 100. The setting key 328 is similar to a key or a key serving as a trigger for executing setting change processing and setting confirmation processing described later. The setting switch 332 can be pressed and is used to change a set value that has been set in setting change processing described later. As described above, the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are accommodated in the main board case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager can not easily access the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332.

  Further, a payout / firing control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. The payout / firing control circuit 300 is connected to a payout device 340 for paying out the gaming balls, a launching device 15 for launching the gaming balls, a card unit 360, and the like. The dispensing device 340 is provided in the dispensing unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation on the ball lending operation panel 370 is supplied.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340 upon receiving a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 or a rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, Control is performed to cause the payout device 340 to pay out the gaming balls. In addition, the payout / firing control circuit 300 is configured such that when the player handles the firing handle 32 and is rotated in the clockwise direction, the firing solenoid (shown in FIG. Power supply to control the firing of game balls.

  Further, the sub control circuit 200 (command input port 208) is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control regarding sound generated from the speaker 24, control regarding light of the lamp 25, and the like in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  In the present embodiment, while the main control circuit 100 supplies a command to the sub control circuit 200, the sub control circuit 200 can not supply a signal to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The control circuit 200 may be configured to be able to transmit a signal to the main control circuit 100.

  The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, an audio control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an item control circuit 207, a command input port 208, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes effects according to the progress of the game in response to the command from the main control circuit 100. Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to the effect button switch 310 which is turned on / off by the operation of the effect button 62.

  The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

  The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the game effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are used as storage means for storing programs, tables and the like, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a computer readable storage medium having control means If it is, it may be another aspect. For example, as the storage unit, a storage medium such as a hard disk drive, a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the program, table, etc. may not be stored in advance, but may be downloaded after power on and stored in the work RAM 203 or the like. Furthermore, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded in different storage media.

  The work RAM 203 has a function of storing values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can read and write may be used.

  The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM storing data for generating various image data, a frame buffer for buffering image data, and image signals for image data. Equipped with a D / A converter etc.

  The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in a frame buffer in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to a game, such as decorative symbol image data indicating a decorative symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

  Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal, and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Thus, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to a game.

  The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for performing control relating to voice generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC for controlling voice, a voice data ROM for storing various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying a voice signal (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one audio data from a plurality of audio data stored in the audio data ROM in response to an audio generation instruction supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 24.

  The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including a decoration lamp and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decoration data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored, and the like.

  The item control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each item. The item control circuit 207 is a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each of the items, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, and a character data ROM in which an operation pattern and a lighting pattern are stored. Etc.

  Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from the plurality of operation patterns stored in the item data ROM in accordance with the item operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the item data ROM, and a drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each item. The lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from the plurality of lighting patterns stored in the feature data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the item data ROM, and the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each combination.

  The command input port 208 receives the command transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 controls the payout of the winning balls and the rental balls from the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the payout / firing control circuit 300 includes a payout device 350 for paying out the gaming balls, a game. A launcher 340 for launching a ball, a backup clear switch 330 for clearing backup data at the time of power interruption according to the operation of the game arcade manager, and the like are connected.

  The power supply circuit 338 is a power supply circuit created to supply the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / firing control circuit 300, etc. with a power supply voltage necessary to play a game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 .

  A power switch 35 or the like is connected to the power supply circuit 338. The power switch 35 is turned on when the necessary power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Although the setting key 328 and the setting switch 332 are connected to the main control circuit 100 as described above, they may be connected to the power supply circuit 338 instead. Even in this case, it is preferable to be accommodated in a predetermined case so that a third party (for example, a player) other than the gaming machine manager can not easily access the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328. . Even in such a case, in the predetermined case, in addition to the ones in which the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 can not be accessed unless the case is exactly opened, the correspondence of the setting switch 332 and the setting key 328 in the above case When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is rotated from the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed using the key managed by the gaming machine manager and there is a notch only at the location and the back is exposed , And the one that allows the gaming machine manager to access the setting switch 332 and / or the setting key 328.

[2. Function flow]
Next, a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is fired by a user operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, a payout control process of the game ball is performed. In addition, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and an ordinary symbol game using an ordinary symbol.

  When a "big hit" in the special symbol game or a "normal hit" in the normal symbol game, the possibility of winning the game ball relatively increases, and the game ball payout control processing is performed. It will be easier.

  In addition, for various winnings, special symbol starting winning which is one condition for performing the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game, and one condition for performing the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol game It also includes a certain normal symbol start winning game.

  Hereinafter, an outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed by the main CPU 101 as control processing.

  (1) When there is a special symbol start winning in the special symbol game, various random number values (for example, a large hit determination random number value or a symbol determination random number value) from various counters (for example, a big hit determination counter or a symbol determination counter) Is extracted (acquired), and the extracted random number values are stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 9).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable symbol display of the special symbol is established. In this discrimination processing, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random number values are stored by the special symbol start winning, and the variation display of the special symbols is regarded as one condition that various data such as random number values are stored. It is determined that the condition to start is satisfied.

  Next, when the variation display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random number value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination of whether or not to make the "big hit" is performed. Thereafter, stop symbol determination processing is performed. In this processing, the symbol determination random number value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the above-described big hit determination are referred to, and the special symbol to be displayed in a stopped state is determined.

  Next, a fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random pattern value, the result of the above-mentioned big hit determination, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variable display pattern To determine).

  Next, an effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, random number values are extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random number values, the result of the above-described big hit determination, the special symbol to be displayed in the stop mentioned above, and the variation pattern of the special symbol mentioned above are referred to. The effect pattern to be executed along with the variation display of the special symbol is determined.

  Subsequently, a variation display control process is performed to control the variation display of the special symbol with reference to the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variation display of the special symbol as a result of the determined big hit determination. And, production control processing which performs specified production is executed.

  Then, when the variation display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is to be made. In this determination process, when it is determined that the "big hit" has been made, a big hit gaming state control process for performing a big hit gaming state is executed. In the big hit game state, the possibility of the various winnings mentioned above is increased. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "big hit" has not been made, the big hit gaming state control process is not executed.

  If it is determined that the "big hit" has not been made, or if the big hit gaming state control process has ended, a gaming state transition control process is performed to shift the gaming state. In this gaming state transition control process, management of the gaming state at the normal time which is different from the big hit gaming state is performed.

  As the gaming state at the normal time, for example, the gaming state (hereinafter referred to as the “normal gaming state”) determined to be a “big hit” with a predetermined probability in the above-mentioned big hit determination or the probability to be determined as a “big hit” A game state (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving game state") in which a special symbol start winning is easily obtained as a result of a game state (hereinafter referred to as "high probability game state") which increases from the normal game state And the like. Thereafter, determination processing as to whether or not to start the variation display of the special symbol is performed again, and thereafter, various processing of the special symbol control processing described above is repeated.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball is start-up winning during the variation display of the special symbol, various data (big-hit determination random number value, symbol determination random number value, etc. extracted at the start-up winning combination) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. As described above, storing various data (for example, a jackpot determination random number value or the like) until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied is referred to as "pending", and the various data being suspended is referred to as start storage.

  That is, when the game ball starts winning a prize during the variation display of the special symbol, the execution of the variation display of the special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is suspended, and is suspended after the variation display of the special symbol currently being executed. The fluctuation display of the special symbol which is being started is started in order. Below, the various data about the special symbol held is also called "hold ball".

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, as described later, two types of special symbol start winnings (first start opening winning and second starting opening winning) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol starting winning It is possible to suspend the execution of the variable display of the special symbol until. That is, in this embodiment, the execution of the variation display of the special symbol can be suspended up to a total of eight in total of four of the first special symbol and four of the second special symbol.

  Although not shown in FIG. 9, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment determines the hit of the holding ball (presence or absence of the “big hit” winning) based on the information of the holding ball described above, and further, It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the determination result, that is, a preread effect function.

  (2) When there is a normal symbol start winning in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the normal hit determination counter, and the random number value is stored (normal symbol start in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 9) Refer to the flow of winning process).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9, in the normal symbol control processing during the normal symbol game, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is established. In this determination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning, and the condition to start the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is established with the random number value stored as one condition. Determine.

  Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random number value extracted from the normal hit determination counter is referred to, and the normal hit determination as to whether or not to be the “normal hit” is performed. Thereafter, fluctuation pattern determination processing is performed. In this process, the result of the normal hit determination is referred to, and the variation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

  Next, the result of the determined ordinary hit determination and the variation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the variation display control processing for controlling the variation display of the normal symbol and the effect control processing for performing a predetermined effect are executed .

  When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are finished, it is determined whether or not the "normal hit" is to be made. In this determination process, when it is determined that the “normal hit” is to be made, a normal hit game control process for performing a normal hit game is executed.

  In the normal hit game control processing, the possibility of the various winnings mentioned above, in particular, the possibility of the special symbol starting winning of the gaming ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, when it is determined that the "normal hit" is not made, the normal hit game control processing is not executed. Thereafter, determination processing as to whether or not to start the variation display of the normal symbol is performed again, and thereafter, the various types of processing of the normal symbol control processing described above are repeated.

  As mentioned above, in the pachinko game, the game balls are paid out depending on conditions such as whether or not it becomes a "big hit" in the special symbol game, the transition state of the gaming state, and whether or not it becomes "normal hit" in the normal symbol game. The ease with which the control process is performed changes.

  In the present embodiment, as a random number value extraction method, a soft random number method in which random numbers are generated within a predetermined range (width) by executing a program by the main CPU 101 is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko gaming machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, random number values from counters (so-called ring counters) in the random number generator. A hard random number system for extracting H may be adopted as an extraction system of various random number values described above.

  When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent extraction of the same random value in a predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[3. Display device]
[3-1. Liquid Crystal Display Device]
The liquid crystal display device 16 is made of liquid crystal, and performs various effect display in the display area.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, the effect image associated with (corresponding to) the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) described later is a display area Is displayed on. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being variably displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74), for example, 1 to 8 except for a specific case. A plurality of effect identification symbols (decorative symbols) consisting of numbers, various characters and the like are variably displayed in the display area.

  Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol portion (the first special symbol display portion 73 and the second special symbol display portion 74), a plurality of decorative symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area. Ru.

  And, when the special symbol which is stopped and displayed in the special symbol part (the first special symbol display part 73 and the second special symbol display part 74) is a specific mode (the result of the stop display is "big hit") , An effect image for making the player know that the player is a "big hit" is displayed in the display area.

  As an effect for making a player know that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of stop-displayed decorative symbols are in a specific mode (for example, a mode in which the same decorative symbols are arranged along a predetermined direction) Then, there is an effect such as displaying an image notifying "big hit".

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image related to the display content of the first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 described later is displayed. For example, in the display area, pending information (for example, the same number of pending symbols as the pending number) is displayed to notify the pending number (starting storage number) of the variation display of the special symbol. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect is performed based on the information of the holding ball of the special symbol, but the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 described later is the predetermined mode, the effect image for causing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 You may further provide the function to display.

[3-2. Special symbol display section]
The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is a display device that variably displays a special symbol in the special symbol game. In this embodiment, a special symbol display unit (a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) is configured by a 7-segment display that displays a special symbol by a symbol, a number, a symbol or the like.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to this, You may comprise a special symbol display part (1st special symbol display part 73, 2nd special symbol display part 74), for example by several LED. In this case, a display pattern configured by turning on / off a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

  The special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) is triggered by the game ball winning in the first start opening 420 or the second start opening 440 (special symbol start winning) , Display the special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner. Then, the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) performs the change display of the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs the stop display of the special symbol.

  Hereinafter, the special symbol that is variably displayed when the gaming ball wins the first starting hole 420 is referred to as a first special symbol. Also, a special symbol that is variably displayed when the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 440 is called a second special symbol.

  In the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74), when the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed is a specific aspect (a "big hit" aspect) The gaming state transitions from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

  That is, in the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of shifting to the big hit gaming state, It is a "big hit".

  In the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening 53 is opened. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball wins the first starting opening 420, and the first special symbol is specified in the special symbol display portion (the first special symbol display portion 73, the second special symbol display portion 74). When the stop display is performed in the mode, the special winning opening 53 is in the open state.

  The open state of each big winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of gaming balls have been won, or until a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the big winning opening that was in the open state is in the closed state.

  In the following, a game in which the special winning opening 53 is in a state (open state) in which the game ball can be easily received is referred to as a round game. During the round games, the big winning opening is closed.

  In addition, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round. In each round game, the special winning opening 540 is one of the conditions when the count of gaming balls that have won the special winning opening 540 reaches 10 and when the open time reaches 30 sec. When it meets, it will be in a closed state.

  In addition, in the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74), when the special symbol stopped and displayed is an aspect other than a specific aspect (an aspect of “missing”) The gaming state does not shift except when winning the fall lottery.

  That is, in the special symbol game, the special symbol is variably displayed by the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a game in which the state is transferred or maintained.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 420 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variation of the first special symbol corresponding to the winning The display (hold ball) is suspended.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the held first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be suspended (so-called "number of suspended balls (number of balls reserved)") is specified to be at most four times (pieces).

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning (holding ball) Is put on hold.

  Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the held second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the second special symbol to be suspended (the number of suspended items) is specified to a maximum of four times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending variable symbols for special symbols is eight in total.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when the holding ball of the first special symbol and the holding ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one of the special symbols is executed preferentially to the variable display of the other special symbol. . Specifically, the holding ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested rather than the holding ball of the first special symbol. In addition, this invention is not limited to this, When the holding ball of a 1st special symbol and the holding ball of a 2nd special symbol are mixed, you may make it perform the fluctuation display of a special symbol in the held order.

[3-3. Normal symbol display section]
The normal symbol display unit 71 is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol display unit 71 is disposed on the left side of the special symbol display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74) as viewed from the player side.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 is a display device that variably displays the normal symbol in the normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display unit 71 is configured of a plurality of LEDs (normal symbol display LEDs). And in the normal symbol display part 71, the display pattern comprised by lighting and light extinction of each normal symbol display LED is represented as a normal symbol.

  The normal symbol display unit 71 alternately turns on / off the two normal symbol display LEDs in response to the game ball having passed through the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 4), and performs normal symbol variation display. Then, the normal symbol display unit 71 performs the variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs the stop display of the normal symbol.

  In the normal symbol display section 71, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (a mode of "normal hit"), the normal motorized role 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state only for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "losing"), the normal motorized role 46 maintains the closed state.

  That is, the normal symbol game is a game in which the normal symbol is variably displayed by the normal symbol display unit 71, and then the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal motorized role 46 operates according to the result.

  If the gaming ball passes the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 4) during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol in the variation display is stopped and displayed, the variation display of the suspended normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of the variable symbols of the normal symbol to be suspended (ie, the "number of suspended units") is specified at a maximum of four times (pieces).

[3-4. Normal symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The normal symbol holding display device 63 is a device for displaying the number of holdings of the variation display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol holding display device 63 is provided with a plurality of normal symbol holding display LEDs, and the normal symbol holding display device 63 By turning on / off each normal symbol hold display LED, the number of pending variable indication of the normal symbol is displayed.

  Specifically, in the normal symbol hold display device 63, the normal symbol hold display LED is displayed according to the hold number of the normal symbol variation display, and the normal symbol hold display LED is according to the hold number of the normal symbol variation display. Up to four lights up.

[3-5. 1st special symbol hold display device]
The first special symbol hold display unit 75 is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The first special symbol holding display unit 75 is a device for displaying information on the variable display (the holding ball of the first special symbol) of the first special symbol held. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display unit 75 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

  Specifically, in the first special symbol holding display unit 75, the first special symbol holding display LED is displayed according to the number of holdings of the first special symbol variation display, and the first special symbol holding display LED is the first special symbol holding display LED. A maximum of four lights up according to the number of pending display of the variation display of the special symbol.

[3-6. Second special symbol hold display device]
The second special symbol hold display unit 76 is disposed at the lower right portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

  The second special symbol holding display unit 76 is a device for displaying information on the variable display of the second special symbol held (the holding ball of the second special symbol), and the second special symbol holding display unit 76 , And a plurality of second special symbol hold display LED.

  Specifically, in the second special symbol holding display unit 76, the second special symbol holding display LED is displayed according to the number of holdings of the second special symbol variation display, and the second special symbol holding display LED is the second special symbol holding display LED. 2 maximum 4 lights up according to the number of pending displays of the special symbols.

[3-7. Performance display monitor]
Performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 under the control of the main CPU 101. The performance display data is, for example, data indicating the ratio of gaming balls paid out other than the big hit gaming state with respect to the predetermined number (for example, 60000) of firings of the gaming balls, and is also called a base value.

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 counts the base values based on the past game history, and stores the counting result in a specific work area, which will be described later, of the work area of the main RAM 103. Although this specific work area will be described later, it is an area in which data is not cleared even if backup clear processing described later is performed. It should be noted that the aggregation of the base values may be performed based on the predetermined operation being performed, or the aggregation may be always performed so that the base values are always displayed on the performance display monitor 334. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 300 is an all-history aggregation unit that executes aggregation of all base values based on all game history from the initial power-on (the first power-on after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is manufactured) to the present. A set value history history totaling means is provided for executing the setting value base value aggregation based on the past game history for each set value.

  For example, when the display operation of the entire base value is performed by the game machine manager or the like, the entire history aggregation unit executes the aggregation of the above-described entire base value. The main CPU 101 causes the performance display monitor 334 to display all base values aggregated by the all history aggregation means. In addition, when the display operation by the setting value base value is performed, the setting value by history aggregation means executes the aggregation of the setting value base value. The main CPU 101 displays the base value by setting value tabulated by the setting value type history aggregation means on the performance display monitor 334.

  The setting value classified history aggregating means can also add up only the base value for an arbitrary setting value according to the request (operation). In this case, not only the base value of the set value being set, but also the base values of other set values other than the set value which is set can be summed up. Therefore, the main CPU 101 can display the base values for other setting values on the performance display monitor 334 without executing setting change processing described later.

  The main CPU 101 is, for example, both an all-base value aggregated by the all-history aggregation means and an individually-set-value base value aggregated by the set-value history aggregation means according to an operation by the game machine manager or the like. Can be displayed on the performance display monitor 334, or only one of them can be selectively displayed on the performance display monitor 334.

  Further, the main CPU 101 may display only the base value of a specific set value on the performance display monitor 334, or may display the base values of all the set values in a list. In addition, both the total base value and the set value base value may be displayed in a list. When displaying the base values of all set values in a list or when displaying both all base values and base values by set values in a list, use both the performance display monitor 334 and other display means It may be displayed.

  Further, the main CPU 101 includes all history aggregation means and history aggregation means for each setting value, but in addition to or in place of the history aggregation means for each setting value, the setting change processing to be described later is executed to the present A post-setting change history totaling means may be provided to count the post-setting change base value based on the game history. In this case, the main CPU 101 can display the setting value classified base value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334 based on the display operation of the setting changed base value.

  In this manner, pachinko gaming can be performed by displaying all or part of the total base value, the set value base value, and / or the set value base value after the setting change on the performance display monitor 334. It becomes possible to easily confirm the information based on the past game history in the machine 1.

  In the present embodiment, the base value is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, but the total number of payouts for the game balls is paid by entering the special electric role (large winning opening) and the ordinary electric role. It is also possible to display the ratio of the number of game balls played out (payout by bonus). In addition, it may be a display for the total number of shots, and may also display a percentage of the number of game balls paid out by the special electric role (large winning opening). Also, they may be displayed by setting.

[3-8. Error notification monitor]
The error notification monitor 336 displays an error code to be described later. In addition to the error code, the error notification monitor 336 may also display a setting change-in-progress code that indicates that setting change processing that will be described later is in progress, and a setting confirmation-in-progress code that indicates that setting confirmation processing that will be described later. it can. In addition, during the setting change, a symbol (a setting change symbol) which is usually not displayed in the special symbol display device may be displayed.

[4. Basic Specifications of Pachinko Machine]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described using FIGS. 10 to 13. FIG. 10 is a view showing an example of a table showing the probability of the jackpot of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 11 is a hit type when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot (hereinafter referred to as "main symbol") FIG. 12 is a view showing an example of a variation time (variable display time) determination table of a special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200. As shown in FIG. In the following description, terms of the main CPU 101 and the main RAM 103 which are not shown in FIGS. 10 to 13 are used, but these are shown in FIG.

  In describing the jackpot probability shown in FIG. 10, first, the jackpot in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be briefly described.

  When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the gaming ball in the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 4), it extracts the big hit determination random number of the first special symbol from the big hit determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103 (1) A big hit determination (hereinafter referred to as a "first special symbol big hit determination") on the extracted big hit determination random number is performed with reference to a special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown). In addition, extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed even when being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

  Similarly, when the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the gaming ball in the second starting opening 440 (see, for example, FIG. 4), it extracts the big hit determination random number of the second special symbol from the big hit determination counter and stores it in the main RAM 103 With reference to the second special symbol big hit random number determination table (not shown) to be performed, a big hit determination (hereinafter referred to as a "second special symbol big hit determination") on the extracted big hit determination random number is performed. In addition, extraction of the random number for jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed even when being controlled to the jackpot gaming state.

  When the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "loss". Also, when the big hit determination of the second special symbol is performed, it is determined to be either "big hit" or "loss", similarly to the big hit determination of the first special symbol. In the big hit random number determination table of the first special symbol and the big hit random number determination table of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 103, the value of the probability change flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)" respectively ) The relationship between the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random numbers determined to be "big hit" or "loss" and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data" and "loss judgment value data") Is defined.

  In this embodiment, the total random number is 65,536 for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. That is, the above-mentioned big hit judgment random numbers are generated in the range (width) of 0 to 65535. This range is set as a fixed value. The jackpot probability is determined by the number of jackpot judgment value data for the range of jackpot judgment random numbers. The range (width) of the jackpot determination random number can be changed as appropriate.

  Note that the probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state". When the gaming state is "high probability gaming state", the probability change flag is "1", and when the gaming state is "low probability gaming state", the probability change flag is "0".

  The time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state". When the gaming state is "time saving game state", the time saving flag is "1", and when it is "non time saving game state", the time saving flag is "0". In the time saving game state, the number of time saving is also managed by the main CPU 101, and the number of time saving is decremented by one each time the special symbol changes once.

  In the short game state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the probability (normal hit probability) that it is determined to be a normal hit in the normal hit determination is higher than in the non-time short game state. Therefore, in the time saving game state, the frequency at which the ordinary electric wheel 46 changes from the closed state to the open state, that is, the winning frequency of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 440 is increased, as compared with the non time saving game state. However, in the time saving game state, instead of increasing the probability of the normal hitting compared to the non-time short playing state, for example, by increasing the execution frequency of the normal winning lottery (by reducing the variation time of the normal symbol) The frequency at which the object 46 changes from the closed state to the open state may be increased, or by changing the open mode of the ordinary electric jack 46, the ordinary electric jack 46 may be made more easily winning. In addition, two or three of the above three aspects may be combined.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the normal gaming state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF, the probability changing time short gaming state with the probability change flag ON and the time reduction flag ON, and the time saving game with the probability change flag OFF and the time reduction flag ON The main CPU 101 is configured to control any of the game states among the states.

  When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the gaming ball on the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 4) and extracts the big hit determination random number for the first special symbol, the extracted first special symbol for big hit determination random The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the big hit determination of the first special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

  When the main CPU 101 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 (see, for example, FIG. 4) and extracts the big hit determination random number for the second special symbol, the extracted second special symbol for big hit determination random The numerical value is held as a start memory until the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the big hit judgment of the second special symbol is performed to determine whether it is a big hit or a loss.

[4-1. Big hit probability]
As shown in FIG. 10, in the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, the jackpot probability differs depending on the set value being set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probable variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each setting value is about 1/300 in setting 1, about 1/290 in setting 2, and about 3 in setting 3 It is 1/280, 1/250 of setting 4 and 1/260 of setting 5 and 1/250 of setting 6. In addition, when it is a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON) where jackpot probability is relatively high, jackpot probability for each setting value is about 1/30 in setting 1, about 1/29 in setting 2 and setting 3 The setting is about 28: 1, the setting 4 is about 27: 1, the setting 5 is about 26: 1, and the setting 6 is about 25: 1.

  That is, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, the number of jackpot determination value data of the first special symbol is set to the set value By changing accordingly, the jackpot probability is made to differ according to the set value. For example, in the low probability gaming state in the first special symbol, for the range (0 to 65535) of the jackpot determination random number which is a fixed value, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1, 226 in setting 2 By setting 234 pieces in setting 3, setting 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5 and setting 262 in setting 6, the jackpot probability is made different according to the setting value. Also, the number of big hit judgment value data in the high probability gaming state is 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, 26 in setting 6 It has become.

  Moreover, in the big hit judgment of the second special symbol, the big hit probability is different according to the set value being set. When the jackpot probability is relatively low in the low probability gaming state (probable variation flag OFF), the jackpot probability for each setting value is 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, and 280 minutes in setting 3 It is 1/270 for 1 setting, 1/260 for 5 setting, and 1/250 for 6 setting. Moreover, when it is a high probability gaming state (probability variation flag ON) in which the big hit probability is relatively high, the big hit probability for each setting value is 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, and 28 in setting 3. The setting is 1/27, 1/26 for setting 5 and 1/25 for setting 6.

  That is, also regarding the big hit probability of the second special symbol, the big hit probability is made to differ according to the set value by changing the number of big hit judgment value data according to the set value. For example, in the low probability gaming state in the second special symbol, for the range (0 to 65535) of the jackpot determination random number which is a fixed value, the number of jackpot determination value data is 218 in setting 1, 226 in setting 2 By setting 234 pieces in setting 3, setting 243 in setting 4, 252 in setting 5 and setting 262 in setting 6, the jackpot probability is made different according to the setting value. Also, the number of big hit judgment value data in the high probability gaming state is also 21 in setting 1, 22 in setting 2, 23 in setting 3, 24 in setting 4, 25 in setting 5, 26 in setting 6 It has become one.

  In addition, in the big hit judgment of the 1st special symbol and the big hit judgment of the 2nd special symbol, the big hit probability defined according to setting is the same. That is, if the setting value is the same, the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the first special symbol and the big hit probability in the big hit determination of the second special symbol are the same. For example, in case of setting 3, the big hit probability in the big hit judgment of the first special symbol is 1/280 in the low probability gaming state (1/28 in the high probability gaming state), and this big hit probability is the second special symbol It is the same as the big hit probability in the big hit judgment of (1/280 in low probability gaming state, 1/28 in high probability gaming state).

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are six stages of setting 1 to setting 6, but the setting values do not necessarily have to be six stages, and can be arbitrarily set if there are a plurality of stages.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the setting value is different, the jackpot probability is also changed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common jackpot probability may be obtained with a plurality of setting values. For example, the jackpot probability common to setting 1 and setting 2 (first probability), the jackpot probability common to setting 3 and setting 4 (second probability higher than the first probability), and setting 5 It may be made to be a common big hit probability (a third probability higher than the second probability) with the setting 6.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number generated by the main CPU 101 is set as a fixed value in the range of 0 to 65535, and for the range of the jackpot determination random number which is a fixed value. The jackpot probability is made to differ for each setting value by changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the setting value, but the method for making the jackpot probability different for each setting value is not limited to this, and the jackpot judgment value The number of data may be common to all settings, and the big hit probability may be made different according to the set value by changing the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as a total random number according to the set value. For example, the number of big hit judgment value data is set to 218 common to all settings, the range (width) of the big hit judgment random number is in the range of 0 to 65535 in setting 1 (big hit probability is about 300/000), in setting 2 Range of 0 to 63219 (big hit probability is 1/290), range of 0 to 61039 with setting 3 (big hit probability of 1/280), range of 0 to 58859 at setting 4 (big hit probability of 1/270) In the setting 5, the range from 0 to 56,679 (big hit probability is 1/260), and in the setting 6, from 0 to 54499 (big hit probability is 1/250), the main CPU 101 determines the big hit in the range according to the setting value By generating a random number, the jackpot probability can be changed according to the set value. Moreover, according to this method, the jackpot probability is changed by changing the denominator (range of jackpot judgment random numbers) having more digits than the number of numerators (number of jackpot judgment value data). Compared with a method in which the range is fixed and the number of big hit determination value data is changed according to the set value, it is possible to set the big hit probability for each set value in detail.

  In the above, the number of big hit determination value data is common to all settings, and the range (width) of the big hit determination random number as a total random number is changed according to the set value, but the number of big hit determination value data is all set It is not essential to make common. For example, in setting 1, the number 218 of big hit determination value data, the range (width) of the big hit determination random number is in the range of 0 to 65535 (big hit probability is about 300 times smaller), and in setting 2, the big hit determination value data The number (219) of the jackpot judgment random numbers range (width) from 0 to 63509 (the jackpot probability is about 1/290), and in setting 3, the number of jackpot judgment value data 220, the jackpot judgment random number The range (width) is set to a range of 0 to 61,599 (big hit probability is about 1/280). In setting 4, the number 221 of big hit judgment value data and the range (width) of a big hit judgment random number range from 0 to 59,669 (The jackpot probability is about 1 / 270th, and in setting 5, the number (22) of the jackpot judgment value data, the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number range from 0 to 57719 (the jackpot probability is about 1 / 260th) And in setting 6 The jackpot judgment value data and the jackpot judgment random number so that the number 223 of the jackpot judgment value data and the range (width) of the jackpot judgment random number are in the range of 0 to 55749 (the jackpot probability is about 1/250). Even when both of the ranges (widths) are changed according to the set value, the set value is larger than the method of changing the number of big hit determination value data according to the set value with the range of the big hit determination random number as a fixed value. It becomes possible to set each big hit probability finely.

  When the main CPU 101 changes the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as the total random number according to the set value, the setting check process of step S74 or step S82 described later (see FIG. 30). ), In addition to or instead of determining whether the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5”, for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as a total random number is set It may be checked whether or not it is a range corresponding to the value, and / or whether or not the number of jackpot determination value data is the number defined in the set value. When it is determined that the check is not normal (for example, the range (width) of the jackpot determination random number as a total random number or / and the number of jackpot determination value data is out of the range according to the set value) (described later In the case corresponding to NO in S721), the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to advance the game.

[4-2. Big hit distribution]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the jackpot distribution when the result of the jackpot determination of the special symbol is a jackpot, that is, the selectivity of the stop symbol (main symbol) of the special symbol will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 11, the distribution of the main symbol is common to all settings. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 11 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 selects a main symbol based on the extracted symbol determination random number, the special symbol 1-1 (sorting probability 25.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 25.0%), special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 25.0%), and special figure 18 (allocation probability 25.0%) Decide on one of them. The special figure 1-1 is the number of rounds 4, the probability change flag OFF, and a big hit of 100 times of time reduction. Special figure 1-2, the number of rounds 4, probability variation flag ON, time saving continues until the next big hit gaming state is executed (time saving flag is set to OFF when the next big hit gaming state is started) It is a big hit. A special figure 1-3 is a round number of 10, a definite change flag OFF, and a big hit of 100 times of time reduction. The special figure 18 is a big hit that the number of rounds 10, the probability change flag ON, and the time saving continue until the next big hit gaming state is executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 displays the first special symbol in a fluctuating time determined with reference to FIG. Execute control to stop at.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag ON as in the special figure 1-2 or the special figure 1-4) After the big hit gaming state ends, the high probability gaming state continues until the next big hit gaming state is started. In such a probability change loop machine, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the high probability gaming state is a big hit, and when the predetermined condition is satisfied, after the big hit gaming state ends, the next big hit gaming state starts again The high probability gaming state continues until it is done. And, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the high probability game state is a big hit, and the predetermined condition is not established (in the present embodiment, the probability change flag as in the special figure 1-1 or the special figure 1-3) After the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to the low probability gaming state without being controlled to the high probability gaming state).

  When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 selects the main symbol based on the extracted symbol determination random number, the special symbol 21 (distribution probability 50.0%) or the special symbol 22 ( The distribution probability is determined to be 50.0%). A special figure 21 is a round number of 10, a definite change flag OFF, and a big hit of 100 times of time reduction. The special figure 22 is a big hit that the number of rounds 10, the probability change flag ON, and the time saving continue until the next big hit gaming state is executed. When the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 changes and displays the second special symbol over a fluctuation time determined with reference to FIG. 12 described later, and then the above determined main symbol Execute control to stop at.

  When the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss, the main CPU 101 determines the lost symbol and executes control to stop the special symbol with the determined lost symbol.

  Further, the number of rounds is the number of rounds of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. Also, if the probability change flag is ON, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends is controlled to the high probability gaming state (playing state in which the probability change flag is set to ON), and if the probability change flag is OFF the big hit gaming state The gaming state after the is finished is controlled to the low probability gaming state (the gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF). In the following, the number of rounds 4, probability flag OFF, 100 times of big hit (for example, special figure 1-1 big hit) is referred to as "4R normal big hit", round number 4, probability variation flag ON, the next big hit game A big hit (for example, the big hit in special figure 1-2) where time saving continues until it is executed is referred to as "4R positive variation big hit", round number 10, positive variation flag OFF, 100 short beats in large hit (for example, special figure 1- 3, the jackpot of the special figure 21 is called "10R normal jackpot", round number 10, a definite change flag ON, a big hit that time saving continues until the next jackpot game is executed (for example, special figure 18, special figure 22 Jackpot) is referred to as "10R probability variation jackpot".

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the time saving flag is always set to ON, but it is not necessarily limited to this and it is determined based on the extracted symbol determination random numbers Whether the time saving flag is set to ON or OFF may be determined according to the main symbol to be played.

[4-3. Variation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the flow until the variation time of the special symbol is determined will be described. Since the variation time of the special symbol corresponds to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the main CPU 101 simultaneously determines the variation time of the special symbol and the variation pattern of the special symbol. The variation pattern of the special symbol also corresponds to the effect content (for example, variation pattern of the decorative symbol) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 4) by the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation pattern of the special symbol to be determined (that is, the variation time and the content of the effect) can be varied according to the set value. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 12 are stored in the main ROM 102. Moreover, although the execution probability of reach production is changed according to the number of reserved special symbols, or as the number of reserved special symbols increases, the variation time in normal fluctuation may be shortened, but these are omitted in FIG. .

  As shown in FIG. 12, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the first special symbol based on the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol, and the second special based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol. Determine the variation time of the symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in this embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol is determined using a table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. However, instead of this, the variation time of the special symbol may be determined using another table for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  In addition, the variation time determination table of the special symbol, the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol, the gaming state, the random number range for reach determination, and the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, presentation selection It defines the relationship among the random number range, the variation pattern (variable display pattern), the variation pattern designation command, the variation time, and the contents of the effect. However, in determining the variation time of the special symbol, the probability variation time short game state and the time reduction game state are not distinguished. Further, for the random number range for reach determination and the random number range for effect selection at the time of determining the variation time of the special symbol, different random number ranges are set according to the set value.

  The random number range for reach determination is a random number provided for determination as to whether or not reach effect will be performed for each set value, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for reach determination from the reach determination counter when the gaming ball is won in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (for example, see FIG. 4), and the extracted reach determination The random number is stored in the main RAM 103. As described above, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit determination using the big hit determination random number value when starting the variation display of the special symbol, but when the result of the big hit determination is lost, it is stored in the main RAM 103 It is determined whether or not the reach effect is to be executed using the reach determination random number. In the present embodiment, the reach determination random number value extracted from the reach determination counter is set in the range of 0 to 249, but this range may be changed as appropriate.

  For example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is a loss, the reach determination random number range where it is determined that the reach effect is to be executed is 0 in settings 1 and 2. Are set to 25 and are set to 0 to 26 in the settings 3 and 4 and are set to 0 to 27 in the settings 5 and 6. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the probability variation time short game state (certain variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) is a loss, the reach determination random number range where it is determined to execute the reach effect is set 1 · · · 2 are specified as 0 to 10, settings 3 and 4 are specified as 0 to 11, and settings 5 and 6 are specified as 0 to 12.

  As described above, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a loss, the reach effect is easier to be performed in the setting 3 · 4 than in the setting 1 · 2 and further, the setting 3 ··· Settings 5 and 6 are easier to be executed than 4. That is, the execution frequency of the reach effect is different according to the setting value, and the execution frequency of the reach effect is higher as the setting value is higher.

  In the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the reach effect is to be performed, the random number range for reach determination is common to setting 1 and setting 2, and is common to setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting The same as 6 but is not limited to this, and all settings may be different.

  In addition, the decision whether or not to execute the reach effect described above is the description about the case where the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss, but when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 It is determined that the reach effect is to be executed regardless of the value of the reach determination random number extracted from the reach determination counter.

  The effect selection random number range is a random number provided for determination of the variation time of the special symbol for each setting value. The main CPU 101 extracts a random number for effect selection from the effect selection counter when the game ball is won in the first start port 420 or the second start port 440 (for example, see FIG. 4), and the extracted effect selection The random number is stored in the main RAM 103. Main CPU 101 is a random number for effect selection stored in main RAM 103 according to the gaming state and the result of the determination of whether or not to execute reach effect (only when the result of the special symbol big hit determination is a loss). Use to determine the variation time of the special symbol. In the present embodiment, the effect selection random number value extracted from the effect selection counter is set in the range of 0 to 99, but this range can be changed as appropriate. When the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 determines the variation time of the special symbol using the random number for effect selection stored in the main RAM 103 according to the gaming state.

  Specifically, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (certain flag OFF and time short flag OFF) is a loss and it is decided to execute the reach effect, It is determined as follows. That is, the random range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal reach during normal) is defined as 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2 and 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, 0 to 59 are defined. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normally super reach A) is specified in 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2 and in 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and in the settings 5 and 6, it is defined in 60 to 89. Further, the random range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 6.

  In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time short flag OFF) is a loss and it is decided not to execute the reach effect is as follows: To be determined. That is, the random range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to 10000 msec (normal fluctuation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2 and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, 0 to 49 are defined. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to 5000 msec (normal fluctuation B) is specified in 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2 and in 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is defined in 50 to 99.

  In addition, the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol in the probability variation time short game state (certain variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) and the normal time short gaming state (certain variation flag OFF and time reduction flag ON) The variation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to 25000 msec (time reach is normal reach) is defined in 0 to 57 in settings 1 and 2 and is defined in 0 to 58 in settings 3 and 4 In settings 5 and 6, 0 to 59 are defined. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (super reach A during the short time) is specified in 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2 and in 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and in the settings 5 and 6, it is defined in 60 to 89. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to 45000 msec (super reach B during the short time) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 6.

  In addition, the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol in the probability variation time short game state (certain variation flag ON and time short flag ON) and the normal time short gaming state (certain variation flag OFF and time short flag ON) The variation time of the special symbol when it is determined is determined as follows. That is, the random range for effect selection in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined to 4000 msec (shortened fluctuation A) is defined as 0 to 51 in settings 1 and 2 and 0 to 50 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, 0 to 49 are defined. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 2000 msec (shortened variation B) is defined in 52 to 99 in settings 1 and 2 and in 51 to 99 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, it is defined in 50 to 99.

  In addition, since the main symbol is determined when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss, with the determination of the variation time of the special symbol not involved.

  The variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (certain flag OFF and time short flag OFF) is a big hit is common to all main symbols and is determined as follows. That is, the random range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 20000 msec (normal reach during normal) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2 and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4 In settings 5 and 6, 0 to 3 are defined. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (usually middle super reach A) is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2 and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and it is defined in 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Further, the random range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 6.

  In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the probability variation time short game state (certain variation flag ON and time reduction flag ON) and the normal time short gaming state (certain variation flag OFF and time reduction flag ON) is a big hit, Common to all main symbols, determined as follows. That is, the random range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to 25000 msec (time reach is normal reach) is defined as 0 to 1 in settings 1 and 2 and 0 to 2 in settings 3 and 4. In settings 5 and 6, 0 to 3 are defined. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 35000 msec (Super reach A during the short time) is defined as 2 to 49 in settings 1 and 2 and 3 to 49 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and it is defined in 4 to 49 in the settings 5 and 6. Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 45000 msec (super reach B during short time) is defined as 50 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 6.

  Thus, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the special symbol as long as the gaming state, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol, and the result of the determination of whether to execute reach effect are the same. Is easier to be determined as a shorter variation time in settings 3 and 4 than in settings 1 and 2 and is further likely to be determined as a variation time shorter in settings 5 and 6 than in settings 3 and 4. Therefore, as the setting value is higher, the average of the variation time of the special symbol becomes shorter, and the number of variations of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of times of drawing) increases. As a result, there is a high expectation that the number of times the jackpot gaming state is executed when viewed in unit time increases, and the probability that the jackpot gaming state is executed within the unit time is also high. It is possible to execute an advantageous game.

  In the present embodiment, when determining the variation time of the special symbol, the random number range for effect selection is common to setting 1 and setting 2, and is common to setting 3 and setting 4, and setting 5 and setting 6 Although common to each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and all the set values may be different.

  In addition, the variation time of the special symbol when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol is a big hit is determined to be common to all the main symbols, but it is not limited to this, the special symbol according to the main symbol May be configured to be different from each other.

  The fluctuation pattern is data representing fluctuation time and presentation contents. For example, the fluctuation pattern “02H” represents a normal medium super reach B with a fluctuation time of 40000 msec.

  The fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 as data representing the fluctuation time and the contents of the effect. For example, if the fluctuation pattern determined by the main CPU 101 is “05H”, a fluctuation pattern designation command of “83H05H” is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. At this time, a symbol specifying command for specifying the main symbol determined by the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101) is also transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

[4-4. Stop symbol of decorative symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 13, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, an example of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol when the main symbol is determined by the selectivity shown in FIG. 11 will be described . The contents of the table shown in FIG. 13 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

  When the sub control circuit 200 (sub CPU 201) receives the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed based on the main symbol specified by the symbol designation command regardless of the setting value. decide. For example, when the main symbol identified by the symbol designation command transmitted from the main control circuit 100 is the special symbol 1-2, the sub CPU 201 determines that all the decorative symbols are the same as the specific symbol (for example, “7” symbol) The distribution probability of the above aspect is 0%, so that all the decorative symbols (three decorative symbols in this embodiment) become the same even pattern (distribution probability 30.0%) or all the ornaments The pattern is determined to be the same odd pattern (allocation probability 70.0%). In the present embodiment, although the specific symbol is the “7” symbol, the present invention is not limited thereto, and other symbols (for example, “V” symbol) may be used as the specific symbol if it can be recognized as a jackpot with a high degree of profit from the player. Also good.

  In addition, as above-mentioned, the main symbol shown by FIG. 13 is determined when the result of the big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201 refers to FIG. 13 to determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a lose, FIG. The symbol other than the symbol shown in is determined as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. The symbols other than the symbols shown in FIG. 13 correspond to, for example, symbols or the like in which at least one of the decorative symbols in all the decorative symbols is different from the other decorative symbols.

  Thus, according to FIG. 13, when the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, the mode when all the decorative symbols are stopped is any of the first special symbol and the second special symbol judgment Whether the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is a big hit controlled to the high probability gaming state, whether the number of rounds of round games to be executed in the big hit gaming state is 10R It may differ depending on

  That is, when the main symbol determined with reference to FIG. 11 is the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-3 or the special figure 2-1 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit where the probability change flag is not set ON), Regardless of the set value, it is always stopped in an aspect (hereinafter referred to as "first aspect") in which all the decorative symbols become the same even symbols.

  Also, when the main symbol is a special symbol 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the first pattern or an odd symbol with the same design symbol but the same symbol except for the '7' symbol which is a specific symbol, regardless of the set value. Stop in an aspect (hereinafter referred to as "the second aspect") to be an odd symbol of.

  In addition, when the main symbol is a special figure 1-4 (10R probability variation big hit), regardless of the setting value, a mode in which all the decorative symbols become the same odd symbols, or all the decorative symbols are the same specific symbol and Stop in the following aspect (hereinafter referred to as "specific aspect").

  Furthermore, when the main symbol is a special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit), it stops in a specific mode regardless of the set value. The special figure 1-4 and the special figure 2-2 are both 10R probability variation big hit, but the special figure 1-4 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420, so the big hit in the normal gaming state It is highly likely that you won. Further, since the special view 2-2 is a big hit based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, there is a high possibility that the big hit is won in the high probability gaming state or the time saving gaming state.

  In this way, stopping in a specific mode determines a 10R probability variation big hit with the highest degree of profit for the player, and stopping in a mode in which all the decorative symbols become the same odd symbol, a probability variation big hit (4R probability variation big hit or 10R Certainty big hit) is decided. On the other hand, when stopping in the first mode, although it is determined that the 10R probability variation big hit is not the greatest for the player, the possibility of the 4R probability variation big hit remains.

  In addition, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, it may be made to inform the player when all the decorative symbols are stopped, regarding which big hit the big hit is, or a big hit game Notification may be made during execution of the state, or may be made when the big hit gaming state ends. Also, although not adopted in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the high probability gaming state is in spite of the fact that the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is a big hit controlled to the high probability gaming state It may be controlled to a so-called "latency probability change state" which does not clearly indicate to the player that it is controlled.

[5. Other Examples of Basic Specifications of Pachinko Machine]

In addition, although the basic specification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is as having mentioned above, it is not restricted to the above-mentioned specification, It can change suitably. An example in which the basic specifications are appropriately changed will be described below. However, it is needless to say that the following description is an example and is not limited thereto.
[5-1. Modified example of variation time of special symbol]
Next, with reference to FIG. 14, a variation of the variation time of the special symbol (that is, the variation pattern of the special symbol) will be described. FIG. 14 is a view showing another example of the variation time determination table of the special symbol stored in the main ROM 102. As shown in FIG. In addition, as described above, depending on the number of reserved special symbols, the execution probability of reach effect is changed, and as the number of reserved special symbols increases, the variation time in the normal fluctuation may be shortened. Is omitted.

  Further, the main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the variation of the special symbol variation special symbol described with reference to FIG. 14 is a lottery number for counting the number of times of execution of the variation number of the special symbol (that is, the lottery number of the special symbol). A counting means (not shown) is provided. The lottery number counting means is reset, for example, at the start of the big hit gaming state, and starts counting the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 14, in another example, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time reduction flag OFF) is a loss, the determination of whether or not to execute reach effect is It is performed according to both the number of times of variation of the special symbol counted starting from the point when the big hit gaming state ends and the set value.

  Specifically, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol starting from a specific time (for example, when the big hit gaming state ends) is 0 to 1000, the random number range for reach determination determined to execute reach effect Is defined as 0 to 25 in settings 1 and 2 and is defined to 0 to 26 in settings 3 and 4 and is defined to 0 to 27 in settings 5 and 6. These are the same as in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit gaming state ends becomes 1001 times or more, the random number range for reach determination determined to execute reach effect is 0 to 10 in settings 1 and 2. In settings 3 and 4 and 0 to 5 in settings 3 and 4 and 0 to 1 in settings 5 and 6. That is, if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a loss, the execution probability of the reach effect is twice as high as the settings 3 and 4 in the settings 1 and 2 and in the settings 3 and 4 compared to the settings 5 and 6 Execution probability of reach production is as high as 5 times (execution probability of reach production is as high as 10 in setting 1 and 2 compared with setting 5 and 6).

  Thus, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit gaming state ends becomes 1001 times or more, the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit gaming state ends is 0 to 1000 times Compared to the above, the execution probability of the reach effect is significantly different according to the setting.

  Also, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time short flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined to perform the reach effect, the big hit game also about the variation time of the special symbol The setting difference is remarkable when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol starting from the time when the state is ended is 0 to 1000 and when it is 1001 or more.

  Specifically, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the time when the big hit gaming state ends is 0 to 1000, the variation time of the special symbol is determined to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal) random number range for effect selection Is defined as 0 to 57 in the settings 1 and 2, 0 to 58 in the settings 3 and 4, and 0 to 59 in the settings 5 and 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 30000 msec (normally super reach A) is specified in 58 to 89 in settings 1 and 2 and in 59 to 89 in settings 3 and 4. It is defined, and in the settings 5 and 6, it is defined in 60 to 89. Further, the random range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to be 40000 msec (normally super reach B) is defined as 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 6. These are the same as in FIG.

  On the other hand, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit gaming state ends becomes 1001 times or more, the variation range of the special symbol is set to 20000 msec (normal reach during normal) random number range for effect selection is set 1 It is not prescribed | regulated by -4, and it is prescribed | regulated to 0-99 by setting 5 * 6. In addition, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to 30000 msec (normally super reach A) is specified as 0 to 89 in settings 1 to 4, and not specified in settings 5 and 6. . Furthermore, the random number range for effect selection in which the variation time of the special symbol is determined to 40000 msec (normally super reach B) is specified in 90 to 99 in common with settings 1 to 4, and is specified in settings 5 and 6. Absent. Therefore, under the so-called big-sloppy situation where the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the point when the big hit gaming state ends is 1001 or more, the setting value being set is suggested to the player by reach effect executed It becomes possible.

  Also, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the normal gaming state (probability change flag OFF and time short flag OFF) is a loss and it is determined to perform the reach effect, the point at which the big hit gaming state ends is taken as the starting point When the number of times of variation of the special symbol to be performed is 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect is lower as the setting value is higher. In addition, even if the reach effect is executed, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of executing the reach effect that the variation time of the special symbol is shorter.

  As described above, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit gaming state is 1001 or more, the higher the set value, the shorter the average of variation time of the special symbol per time, and the unit The number of times the special symbol changes per hour (i.e., the number of lotteries) is further increased. As a result, the expectation that the number of executions of the big hit game when viewed in unit time increases is higher, and the probability that the big hit game is executed in the unit time is also further increased.

  In addition, it is extremely difficult to estimate the set value that has been set from the execution frequency of the reach effect if the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol starting from the end of the big hit gaming state is less than 1000, but the big hit gaming state When the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol starting from the end of the game is 1001 or more, the execution frequency of reach effect will be significantly different according to the set value, so when so-called big hit, the set value is estimated There is room to be done. In this way, when the so-called big hit, the set value set for the player is given without giving a direct loss to the hole (for example, without giving the game ball to the player). By giving the chance to guess, it is possible to give the player fun. Moreover, in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment, the expectation is that the setting value is higher as the execution frequency of the reach production is lower when the player performs a so-called big hit, if the player thinks that the reach production should be originally made. Since the player can hold the game, it is possible to reduce the will to continue the game even if the execution frequency of the reach effect is low.

  In the present embodiment, the starting point from which the variation number of the special symbol is counted is the point when the big hit gaming state ends, but it is not limited thereto. For example, when a predetermined period passes, a high probability gaming state When the high probability gaming state is ended in a pachinko machine called a so-called ST machine to be ended, or when the time saving game state is ended, an arbitrary time point can be used as a starting point.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the specific time point is 1001 or more, the execution probability of the reach effect and the variation time of the special symbol are significantly different according to the set value, but 1001 It does not have to be more than once. For example, the number of times is not limited to a specific number as long as the player feels that the game is cheating.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol starting from the specific time point becomes equal to or more than the specified number, the execution probability of reach effect and the variation time of the special symbol differ significantly depending on the setting value. What is significantly different according to is not necessarily limited to the execution probability of the reach effect and the variation time of the special symbol. For example, the main CPU 101 provides a predetermined waiting time (hereinafter referred to as "opening time") from when the result of the big hit lottery of the special symbol is determined to be a big hit to when it is actually controlled to the big hit gaming state. ing. Further, the main CPU 101 also provides a predetermined standby time (hereinafter referred to as "ending time") from the end of the big hit gaming state to the start of the variation display of the special symbol. The sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204) displays the opening effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the opening time described above, and displays the ending effect on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the ending time described above. In the opening effect, for example, an effect indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big hit, an effect blessing that the result of the special lottery is a big hit, a gaming method in the big hit gaming state (for example, right hit etc.) An instruction to teach etc. is performed. In the ending effect, the effect which shows the amount of award balls paid out in the big hit gaming state, the effect which shows the number of times the big hit gaming state is continued (the number of consecutive nights), the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is high probability game Effects that indicate being controlled to the state, effects that teach gaming techniques in the game state after the big hit gaming state is over (for example, return to the left hit etc.), effects that display the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Etc.

  Specifically, by shortening all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time as the set value increases, the time required for the jackpot gaming state increases as the set value increases. It can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to increase the average number of times of variation of the special symbol per unit time (that is, the number of times of drawing), and the higher the setting value, the more advantageous the player can play the game.

  Also, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with a high setting value, the expected value for withdrawal is higher (for example, the high setting value has a higher probability of big hit), a large number of award balls are paid out in a short time compared to the low setting value. In view of the possibility that all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time may be set to be longer as the set value becomes higher. In this case, since all or at least one of the opening time, the interval time, and the ending time becomes longer as the high set value for the expected value of the payout is higher, the fun of the game with the high set value is secured. In addition, it becomes possible to control the winning balls paid out in unit time.

  In addition, even when the main CPU 101 is controlled to the opening time, the ending time, and the big hit gaming state described above, winning of the game ball to the starting opening (first starting opening 420, second starting opening 440) When detected, various random numbers are extracted, and the setting check process (see FIG. 30) of step S74 and step S82 described later is executed. Then, if it is determined in the setting check process that the setting value data is out of the range of "0" to "5" (NO in step S721 described later), even if it is controlled to the big hit gaming state The main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to advance the game.

5-2. Modification of stop pattern of jackpot distribution and decorative pattern]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17, first and second modified examples of the big hit distribution (select rate of main symbol) when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, and these first and second modified examples The stop symbols of the decorative symbol in the first and second modifications will be described. In the first modification and the second modification, the selection rate of the main symbol is different according to the setting value. In addition, FIG. 15 is a figure which shows the 1st modification about the selectivity of the main symbol when the result of big hit determination of a special symbol is a big hit, and FIG. 16 is a result of big hit determination of a special symbol being a big hit It is a figure which shows the 2nd modification about the selection rate of the main symbol of. FIG. 17 shows an example of the decorative symbol determination table stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200, and is commonly used in the first and second modified examples.

[5-2-1. First modified example]
First, the first modified example will be described with reference to FIG. 15 and FIG. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 15 are stored in the main ROM 102, and the contents of the table shown in FIG. 17 are stored in the program ROM 202 of the sub control circuit 200.

  As shown in FIG. 15, in the first modification, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 made the main symbol according to the set value based on the extracted symbol determination random number In probability, Special figure 1-1, Special figure 1-2, Special figure 1-3, Special figure 1-4, Special figure 1-5, Special figure 1-6, Special figure 1-7, and Special figure 1 Decide on any of -8. However, in this first modified example, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R positive variation big hit", the special figure 1 The special figure 1-7, the special figure 2-1 and the special figure 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", the special figure 1-6, the special figure 1-7, the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2- 4 and "10R probability variation big hit" has become.

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol with the common probability in setting 1 to setting 4, the special symbol 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%), the special symbol 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5 %), Special chart 1-3 (distribution probability 12.5%), special chart 1-4 (distribution probability 12.5%), special chart 1-5 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure In one of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbol is displayed in the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-3 Minute probability 15.0%), Special chart 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special chart 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special chart 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %, Special figure 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and special figure 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). In addition, in setting 6, main figure 1-1, special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20) .0%), special figure 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), special figure 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), special figure 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), The special figure 1-7 (the distribution probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (the distribution probability 20.0%) are determined as either.

  In other words, the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 (both of which are 4R probability variation big hits) that the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is high set value For example, in the setting 5 · 6), the selection ratio in the special drawing 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection ratio in the special drawing 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

  Similarly, the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 (both of which are 10R probability variation big hits) that the big hit classification is common, although the combination probability of the both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, the high setting value (For example, in the setting 5 · 6), the selection rate in the special drawing 1-8 (15. 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

  Furthermore, with regard to special figure 2-2 and special figure 2-4 (both of which are 10R probability variation big hits) that jackpot type is common, although the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, the high setting value (For example, in setting 5 · 6), the selection in special drawing 2−4 (30% in setting 5) than the selection in special drawing 2−2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

  By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201 is, as shown in FIG. 17, a special figure 1-1, a special figure 1-3, a special figure 1-5, a special figure 1-7. , Special figure 2-1, Special figure 2-3 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit where the probability variation flag is not set ON), the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, regardless of the setting value Control to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when it is the special view 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 does not matter the setting value, the first aspect (selectivity 50.0%) or the second aspect (selectivity 50.0%) Control to stop at). In addition, when the main symbol is a special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 is the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 75) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at .0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5 · 6), the selection ratio of special drawing 1-4 is higher than the selection ratio of special drawing 1-2 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6) (15.0% for setting 5 and 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (all are 4R probability variation big hit), they are compared with the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) at the high setting value. The probability that the decorative symbol is stopped in the second mode (a mode having higher expectation for the player than the first mode) is high.

  Similarly, when it is the special view 1-6 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 performs control to always stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. In addition, when the main symbol is a special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 does not depend on the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 · 6), the special figure 1− is selected more than the selectivity of special figure 1-6 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% for setting 5 and 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (all 10R probability variation big hit), they are compared with the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) at the high setting value. Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (a mode having the highest degree of expectation for the player) is high.

  Furthermore, similarly, when the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit) is, the sub CPU 201 selects the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 controls to always stop in the specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 · 6), the special drawing 2-2 of the special drawing 2-2 (20.0% at setting 5, 10.0% at setting 6) The selection rate of 4 (30.0% for setting 5 and 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same big hit type (all 10R probability variation big hit), they are compared with the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) at the high setting value. Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific manner is high.

  As described above, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, it is possible to realize that the stop pattern of the decorative symbol may be different according to the set value even if the big hit type is the same. Become. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 · 6), it is assumed that the combination probability determined to a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a high probability compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

5-2-2. Second modified example]
Next, the second modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. The contents of the table shown in FIG. 16 are stored in the main ROM 102.

  In the first modification, whether or not the probability change flag is set to ON is determined according to the main symbol determined when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit. On the other hand, in the second modification, whether or not the probability change flag is set ON is immediately determined according to the main symbol determined when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit. Absent. Specifically, in the second modified example, unlike the first modified example, a probability varying attacker (not shown) is provided, for example, inside the big winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 4). And, for example, when being controlled to the big hit game state, when the entry of the game ball to the definite change attack is detected, the game state after the particular big hit game state ends is controlled to the high probability game state, to the fixed change attacker When the big hit gaming state ends without the entry of the game ball being detected, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends is controlled to the low probability gaming state. As described above, a pachinko gaming machine that is controlled to the high probability gaming state based on the entry of the gaming ball into the definite change attacker is also a so-called "precise change loop machine".

  As shown in FIG. 16, in the second modification, the accessibility of the game ball to the probability change attacker is different according to the main symbol determined when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit ing. For example, the special figure 1-1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state in a mode that entry of the game ball to the definite change attacker is difficult, and the special figure 1-2 is controlled to the big hit gaming state in the manner that the entry of the game ball to the definite change attacker is easy Controlled by In the present embodiment, the number of time-savings when the jackpot in the "probability of entering the game ball into the probability change attacker" is 100 times, and "the embodiment in which the entry of the game ball into the probability change attacker is easy". When it is a big hit, time saving continues until the next big hit game is executed.

  In the present embodiment, “a mode in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the probability change attacker” is almost equal to almost no possibility that the game ball enters the probability change attacker while being controlled to the big hit gaming state (almost 100% Is controlled to the low probability gaming state with a probability close to. In addition, “a mode in which the game ball can easily enter the probability change attacker” is in the big hit gaming state as long as the game ball is fired toward the placement site of the probability change attacker (for example, the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 4)). This is an aspect in which the gaming ball almost enters the definite change attacker while being controlled (controlled to the high probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%). Therefore, in this second modification, the big hit in "a manner in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the probability change attacker" is referred to as "a normal big hit", and "in a manner in which the game ball easily enters the probability change attacker". The big hit is called "probably big hit".

  However, if it is "an aspect that it is easy to enter the game ball to the definite change attacker", it is controlled to the high probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, and if it is "an aspect that the entry of the game ball to the definite change attacker is difficult" Instead of being controlled to the low probability gaming state with a probability close to 100%, it is difficult to enter the gaming ball into the probability changing attacker when the "entering the gaming ball into the probability changing attacker is easy". An aspect may be such that the high probability gaming state is controlled with a relatively higher probability than that of the aspect.

  For example, as a method of creating a mode in which the game ball is difficult to enter into the odd variation attacker and an easy manner, it does not have the odd variation attacker apart from the big winning opening 540 (see, for example, FIG. 4) internally equipped with the odd variation attacker. It is conceivable to provide another big winning opening (not shown). And an aspect (for example, the special figure 1-2, the special figure 1-4, the special figure 1-6, the special figure 1-8, the special figure 2-2, the special figure 2) which the approach of the game ball to a definite change attacker is easy When it is -4), it controls to the big hit game state which opens the big winning a prize opening 540, the feature which entry of the game ball to the definite change attacker is difficult (for example, special figure 1-1, special figure 1-3, special figure 1 When it is -5, special figure 1-7, special figure 2-1, special figure 2-3) by controlling to the big hit game state which opens the other big prize mouth without opening the big prize mouth 540, It is possible to create an aspect in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the odd-variation attacker, and an aspect in which it is easy. The present invention is not limited to the above-described aspect as long as it is possible to create an aspect in which the entry of the gaming ball into the definite change attacker is difficult and an aspect in which the entry is easy.

  In addition, as described above, when the large winning opening 540 equipped with the probability changing attacker internally and another big winning opening (not shown) not equipped with the definite changing attacker, the big winning opened in the big hit gaming state The setting difference may be given to the mouth. For example, at a low setting value such as setting 1, a big hit gaming state in which another large winning opening is opened is more easily selected than at the large winning opening 540, and at a high setting value such as setting 6, the other large winning opening The big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened can be made easy to be selected as the high setting value so that the big hit gaming state in which the big winning opening 540 is opened is easy to be selected.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in such a second modification, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol based on the extracted symbol determination random number, the setting value In the probability according to the special figure 1-1, the special figure 1-2, the special figure 1-3, the special figure 1-4, the special figure 1-5, the special figure 1-6, the special figure 1-7, and It is determined to be one of Special Figure 1-8. However, in this second modified example, the special figure 1-1 and the special figure 1-3 are "4R normal big hit", the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 are "4R positive variation big hit", the special figure 1 The special figure 1-7, the special figure 2-1 and the special figure 2-3 are "10R normal big hit", the special figure 1-6, the special figure 1-7, the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2- 4 and "10R probability variation big hit" has become.

  Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the main symbol with the common probability in setting 1 to setting 4, the special symbol 1-1 (distribution probability 12.5%), the special symbol 1-2 (distribution probability 12.5 %), Special chart 1-3 (distribution probability 12.5%), special chart 1-4 (distribution probability 12.5%), special chart 1-5 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure In one of 1-6 (distribution probability 12.5%), special figure 1-7 (distribution probability 12.5%), and special figure 1-8 (distribution probability 12.5%) decide. On the other hand, in setting 5, the main symbol is displayed in the special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-2 (distribution probability 10.0%), the special figure 1-3 Minute probability 15.0%), Special chart 1-4 (Distribution probability 15.0%), Special chart 1-5 (Distribution probability 10.0%), Special chart 1-6 (Distribution probability 10.0) %, Special figure 1-7 (allocation probability 15.0%), and special figure 1-8 (allocation probability 15.0%). In addition, in setting 6, main figure 1-1, special figure 1-1 (distribution probability 5.0%), special figure 1-2 (allocation probability 5.0%), special figure 1-3 (allocation probability 20) .0%), special figure 1-4 (allocation probability 20.0%), special figure 1-5 (allocation probability 5.0%), special figure 1-6 (allocation probability 5.0%), The special figure 1-7 (the distribution probability 20.0%) and the special figure 1-8 (the distribution probability 20.0%) are determined as either.

  In other words, the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 (both of which are 4R probability variation big hits) that the big hit type is common, the combination probability of both is high set value For example, in the setting 5 · 6), the selection ratio in the special drawing 1-4 (15.0 in the setting 5) is higher than the selection ratio in the special drawing 1-2 (10.0% in the setting 5 and 5.0% in the setting 6). %, 20.0% in setting 6) is higher (common in settings 1 to 4).

  Similarly, the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 (both of which are 10R probability variation big hits) that the big hit classification is common, although the combination probability of the both is 25.0% regardless of the setting, the high setting value (For example, in the setting 5 · 6), the selection rate in the special drawing 1-8 (15. 0%, 20.0% at setting 6) is higher (common to settings 1 to 4).

  Furthermore, with regard to special figure 2-2 and special figure 2-4 (both of which are 10R probability variation big hits) that jackpot type is common, although the combination probability of both is 50.0% regardless of the setting, the high setting value (For example, in setting 5 · 6), the selection in special drawing 2−4 (30% in setting 5) than the selection in special drawing 2−2 (20.0% in setting 5 and 10.0% in setting 6). 0%, 40.0% at setting 6) is higher.

  By the way, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the sub CPU 201 is, as shown in FIG. 17, a special figure 1-1, a special figure 1-3, a special figure 1-5, a special figure 1-7. , Special figure 2-1, Special figure 2-3 (4R normal big hit or 10R normal big hit where the probability variation flag is not set ON), the decorative symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, regardless of the setting value Control to stop in the first mode.

  On the other hand, when it is the special view 1-2 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 does not matter the setting value, the first aspect (selectivity 50.0%) or the second aspect (selectivity 50.0%) Control to stop at). In addition, when the main symbol is a special figure 1-4 (4R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 is the first mode (selectivity 25.0%) or the second mode (selectivity 75) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at .0%). Here, at a high setting value (for example, setting 5 · 6), the selection ratio of special drawing 1-4 is higher than the selection ratio of special drawing 1-2 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6) (15.0% for setting 5 and 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4 have the same big hit type (all are 4R probability variation big hit), they are compared with the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) at the high setting value. The probability that the decorative symbol is stopped in the second mode (a mode having higher expectation for the player than the first mode) is high.

  Similarly, when it is the special view 1-6 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 performs control to always stop in the second mode regardless of the set value. In addition, when the main symbol is a special figure 1-8 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 does not depend on the set value, the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50. Control to stop at 0%). Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 · 6), the special figure 1− is selected more than the selectivity of special figure 1-6 (10.0% at setting 5, 5.0% at setting 6). The selectivity of 8 (15.0% for setting 5 and 20.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 1-6 and the special figure 1-8 have the same big hit type (all 10R probability variation big hit), they are compared with the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) at the high setting value. Thus, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific mode (a mode having the highest degree of expectation for the player) is high.

  Furthermore, similarly, when the special figure 2-2 (10R probability variation big hit) is, the sub CPU 201 selects the second mode (selectivity 50.0%) or the specific mode (selectivity 50.0%) regardless of the set value. Control to stop at Further, when the main symbol is the special figure 2-4 (10R probability variation big hit), the sub CPU 201 controls to always stop in the specific mode regardless of the set value. Here, as described above, at the high setting value (for example, setting 5 · 6), the special drawing 2-2 of the special drawing 2-2 (20.0% at setting 5, 10.0% at setting 6) The selection rate of 4 (30.0% for setting 5 and 40.0% for setting 6) is higher. Therefore, although the special figure 2-2 and the special figure 2-4 have the same big hit type (all 10R probability variation big hit), they are compared with the low setting value (for example, setting 1 to 4) at the high setting value. Therefore, the probability that the decorative symbol stops in a specific manner is high.

  As described above, also in the second modification, as in the first modification, when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, even if the big hit type is the same, the decoration according to the setting value It can be realized that the stop modes of the symbols can be different. Especially when the setting value is high (for example, setting 5 · 6), it is assumed that the combination probability determined to a specific big hit type (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) is the same when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit Also, it is possible to stop the decorative symbol in a mode (for example, a specific mode) having a relatively high degree of expectation for the player with a high probability compared to when the setting value is low (for example, settings 1 to 4). Become.

  In any of the above-described first and second modifications, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be different according to the set value by making the selection rate of the main symbol different according to the set value. doing. That is, sub CPU 201 does not control the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the setting value, but controls the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the main symbol, and as a result, the decorative symbol according to the setting value The stop symbol of can be different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be configured to be different according to the setting value under the control of the sub CPU 201.

  According to the above-described first and second modifications, providing a difference in the selection rate of the special symbol according to the set value, that is, providing a setting difference in the number of rounds, the probability changing rush rate, and the time shortening rush rate It becomes possible.

[6. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. However, in the following description (description of processing in the main CPU 101), the terms power switch 35, setting switch 332, setting key 328, performance display monitor 334, error notification monitor 336, external terminal board 323, and hall computer 700 are used. However, these are shown in FIG.

[6-1. Power on process]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process by the main CPU 101. For example, when a person in charge of the hall turns on the power switch 35, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs a power-on process (step S10), a setting process related to set values (step S20), and a game recovery process (step). And S30) in order. Each of these processes will be described below. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 always checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level due to a power failure, an OFF operation of the power switch 35, or the like, Perform processing when a power failure occurs, which will be described later.

6-1-1. Processing at power on]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of power-on process. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value to the stack pointer (step S11).

  Next, after the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S12), the main CPU 101 performs a sub control reception acceptance wait process for waiting until the sub control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S13). After that, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing on various devices incorporated in the CPU (step S14).

  Next, the main CPU 101 enables a switch related to the setting value (step S15). The switch relating to the setting value is a switch used when performing the setting process of step S20, and for example, the setting key 328 for starting and ending the setting process, the setting switch 332 for changing the setting value, etc. Equivalent to. Then, the main CPU 101 activates switches related to the setting (step S15), performs read processing of each switch (step S16), and then performs a game permission process (step S17).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the game permission process. In the game permission process of step S17 (see FIG. 19), management of a game permission flag for permitting execution of a game is performed. The game permission flag is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the execution of the game, and is set to OFF when the game can not be performed, for example, when the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103) is not normal. . The game permission process (step S17) will be described below.

  The main CPU 101 first determines whether the power-off situation identification flag is ON (step S1710). The power-off status identification flag is a flag that identifies the status at the time of the last power failure. That is, for example, if a power failure occurs during setting change processing, which will be described later, or the like, there is a high possibility that the power is turned off before the setting change processing is properly completed. Can not do it. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the situation at the time of the previous power interruption can be identified. In the present embodiment, for example, when a power failure occurs during a normal game or during setting confirmation processing to be described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to ON before the power failure. On the other hand, when a power failure occurs during setting change processing described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF before the power failure. In addition, also when a power failure occurs during an abnormal processing described later, the power failure status identification flag is set to OFF. When the data in the main RAM 103 is lost because the power is not turned on in the initial state where power has not been turned on or for a long time, the power-off state identification flag is OFF. Note that the above "normal game" means a game in which neither setting change processing nor setting confirmation processing is performed, and means a normal gaming state in which both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are OFF. Not (following, the same).

  In step S1710, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S1720 if the power-off status identification flag is ON (YES in step S1710), and the gaming permission flag if the power-off status identification flag is OFF (NO in step S1710) Is turned off (step S1750), and then the process proceeds to step S1720.

  In step S1720, the main CPU 101 checks the work area of the main RAM 103. The check of the work area also includes a check as to whether the set value data being set is within a prescribed range (in the present embodiment, within the range of “0” to “5”).

  The work area of the main RAM 103 is a general work area in which data is cleared when backup clear processing described later is performed, and data is held without being cleared in principle even if backup clear processing described later is performed. It is divided into a specific work area. In the specific work area, for example, performance display data, set value data that has been set, and the like are stored. It is data indicating a set value. In the present embodiment, setting value data of “0” to “5” correspond to each of the six setting values “1” to “6”. That is, for example, when the set value set is “4”, the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”.

  In step S1730, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area of main RAM 103 is normal. If normal (YES in step S1730), the process moves to step S1740, and is not normal, ie, abnormal (NO in step S1730). If yes, the game permission flag is turned off (step S1760), and then the process proceeds to step S1740. For example, when the setting value data is not within the prescribed range (in the range of “0” to “5” in the present embodiment), the main CPU 101 determines that the work area of the main RAM 103 is not normal.

  At step S1740, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S1740), the game permission process is ended. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740), the process moves to step S1770.

  In step S1770, main CPU 101 determines whether power is turned on (setting power switch 35 is turned on) when setting key 328 is turned on, that is, the setting key switch signal is turned on. If the setting key switch signal is ON (YES in step S1770), the process advances to step S1780, and if the setting key switch signal is OFF (NO in step S1770), the process advances to step S1810.

  In step S1780, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear switch 330 has been pressed, that is, whether the backup clear signal is ON, and the backup clear signal is ON (YES in step S1780). The flow advances to step S1790, and if the backup clear signal is OFF, the flow advances to step S1810.

  In step S1790, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to ON, and proceeds to step S1800.

  As described above, even if the main CPU 101 determines that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S1740) due to the situation at the time of the previous power interruption or the working area of the main RAM 103 not normal (NO in step S1740), the setting key switch signal ON ( If YES at step S1770 and backup clear signal ON (YES at step S1780), the game permission flag is set to ON at step S1790. That is, when both the power on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on, the game permission flag is turned on even if the game permission flag is turned off. If at least one of the setting key switch signal and the backup clear signal is OFF, the game permission flag is not set from OFF to ON.

  In step S1800, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON, and ends the game permission process. The backup clear flag is a flag indicating whether or not the backup clear process described later needs to be performed, and when the backup clear process needs to be performed, the backup clear flag is set to ON and the backup clear process is performed. The backup clear flag is set to OFF.

  In step S1810, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. When the main CPU 101 performs the process of step S1810, the game permission process is ended. In this manner, by displaying the error code on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hall can not execute the game by confirming the error code displayed on the error notification monitor 336 (the game permission flag is OFF). ) Can be understood. In the present embodiment, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is performed only when both the power-on operation and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 are performed with the setting key switch 328 being turned ON. It is possible to set to ON. That is, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power-off operation is performed to temporarily stop the supply of power, and the game permission flag does not become ON unless a setting change process described later is executed. In the above, the game permission process is ended when the process of step S1810 is performed, but instead, after the process of step S1810 is performed, the condition returns to step S1740 and the game permission flag is turned on. The process of step S1740 to step S1810 may be looped until (1) is satisfied (unless stated in FIG. 20 as YES in step S1780 in FIG. 20).

6-1-2. Setting process]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting process. In the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 18), a setting change process or a setting confirmation process is executed according to the operation situation of the operation of the setting key 328 and the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330. The setting process will be described below.

  First, in step S21, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game permission flag is ON. If the main CPU 101 determines that the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S21), the process moves to step S22, and if the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S21), setting change processing (step S24) and setting confirmation processing ( The setting process is ended without executing any step S26).

  When the setting key switch signal ON (YES in step S22) and the backup clear signal ON (YES in step S23), main CPU 101 performs setting change processing (step S24), and the setting key switch signal ON (YES in step S22). If the backup clear signal is OFF (NO in step S23), the setting confirmation process (step S26) is performed. Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key 328 turned ON, the setting change process (step S24) is executed if the backup clear signal is ON, and the setting confirmation process (step S24) if the backup clear signal is OFF. S26) is performed.

  The main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to ON (step S28) if the setting key switch signal OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal ON (YES in step S27), and the setting change process (step S28). S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are not performed, and the setting process is ended. Further, when the setting key switch signal OFF (NO in step S22) and the backup clear signal OFF (NO in step S27), the main CPU 101 ends the setting processing without executing the processing in step S28 (setting change The process (step S24) and the setting confirmation process (step S26) are not performed either).

[6-1-2-1. Setting change process]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing. Although the setting change process in step S24 (see FIG. 21) is a process for changing the set value that has been set, the setting change process may be ended with the same set value as the set value that has been set. . Further, as described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the game permission flag is not ON unless the power change operation is performed after the power interruption operation is performed to temporarily stop the power supply.

  At the step S2410, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2410), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting change process. If the setting key switch signal is ON and the backup clear signal is ON even if the game permission flag is OFF when the power is turned on, the game permission flag is set ON in step S1790 (see FIG. 20). Setting change processing is executed.

  When the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2410), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2420 and executes the backup clear process. The backup clear process will be described later.

  After executing the backup clear processing in step S2420, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2430, stores the setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 in a register, and proceeds to step S2440. The backup clear process may be performed at any timing as long as the setting change process is started and ended.

  In step S2440, the main CPU 101 performs output setting of the setting change security signal. The setting change security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-described external terminal board 320. The setting change security signal is output for a predetermined time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S2450, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The performance display monitor 334 converts the setting value data stored in the register into a setting value and displays it. For example, when the set value data stored in the register is “3”, the performance display monitor 334 displays the set value “4” corresponding to the set value data “3”. However, if the set value data stored in the register corresponds to the set value set, it is not always necessary to display a number on the performance display monitor. For example, setting value data “0” to “5” are associated with “A” to “F”, respectively, and when the setting value data stored in the register is “3”, for example, “D” corresponding to this. May be displayed on the performance display monitor 334. In this step 2450, although the set value data stored in the register is converted to the set value and displayed on the performance display monitor 334, it is determined in advance by discarding the previous data. An initial value (for example, “1”) may be displayed. In addition, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on for the first time, the main CPU 101 displays a predetermined initial value (for example, “1”), a value not normally displayed (for example, “8”), etc. It may be controlled to be displayed at 334. When displaying a value not normally displayed on the performance display monitor 334, the main CPU 101 does not set a valid setting value and turns the game permission flag OFF unless it is determined in step S2510 that the setting switch 332 has been pressed. You may

  In step S2460, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting such that a setting change in-progress code indicating that the setting is being changed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thus, the person in charge of the hall can grasp that the setting change process is in progress by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

  In step S2470, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF. If the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO in step S2470), the process moves to step S2510.

  In step S 2510, main CPU 101 determines whether or not setting switch 332 has been pressed, and if setting switch 332 has been pressed (YES in step S 251), the process proceeds to step S 2520 and setting values stored in the register After updating the data, the process returns to step S2440. If setting switch 332 is not pressed (NO in step S 2510), the process returns to step S 2440. That is, in the setting change process, as long as it is not determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless it is YES in step S2470), step S2510, step S2520, and step S2440 to step S2470 are looped (step S2510, step S2520, step The processing of step S2440 to step S2470 is repeated).

  Note that when setting switch 332 is pressed (YES in step S 2510), main CPU 101 notifies and sets the updated setting value information to be displayed on performance display monitor 334 in subsequent step S 2450. .

  In addition, unless the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470), the setting value data stored in the register is “0” to “5” each time the setting switch 332 is pressed. (When the set value data is “5”, when the setting switch 332 is pressed, the state returns to “0”). Thus, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the display on the performance display monitor 334 is also cyclically displayed. However, every time the setting switch 332 is pressed, the setting value data stored in the register may be cyclically decreased to “5” to “0”. It may be possible to execute both of the decrease and the decrease.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2470) in step S2470, the process proceeds to step S2480. After shifting to step S2480, the main CPU 101 ends the loop of step S2510, step S2520, and step S2440 to step S2470.

  In step S2480, the main CPU 101 stores the setting value data stored in the register in the main RAM 103. When the process of step S2480 is executed, the set value is decided. That is, in the setting change process, the setting value is determined based on the fact that the operation to turn off the setting key switch signal is performed (determined as YES in step S2470), and the operation to turn off the setting key switch signal. The setting value data stored in the register is only updated if the setting switch 332 is only pressed without executing the command (only looping step S 2510, step S 2520, and step S 2440 to step S 2470). The setting value data stored in the main RAM 103 is not updated.

  If the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470), the operation is not detected even if the setting key 328 is returned again (the setting key switch signal is detected as ON). Setting value can not be changed unless the power-off operation (the OFF operation of the power switch 35) is performed. At this time (when the setting key switch signal is determined to be OFF in step S2470 (YES in step S2470, the setting key 328 is returned again)), the main CPU 101 performs the setting stored in the register. The value data may be displayed on the performance display monitor 334 so that setting confirmation can be performed (setting confirmation processing is performed). At that time (when the setting confirmation process is performed), the main CPU 101 may turn off the game permission flag until the setting key switch signal is turned off.

  In step S2490, the main CPU 101 sets the notification so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2500, sets the notification so that the initialization code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and changes the setting. End the process.

  When the setting change process of step S24 (see FIG. 21) is ended, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 18) is ended, and the process returns to the game return process of step S30 (see FIG. 18).

  In addition, after execution of setting change processing of step S24 (refer to FIG. 21), when execution of the game becomes possible through game return processing described later, during a fixed period after the game is started, or Information that suggests that the setting change process may have been executed at a predetermined timing after the start of the information, information that indicates that the setting change process may have changed to a higher setting value, Information that suggests that the setting change process may have changed to a lower setting value, and the setting change process has changed the setting value in multiple stages or more (for example, two or more stages such as setting 6 to setting 4) Information related to the setting change processing, such as information indicating that there is a possibility, may be displayed on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16 or the like. For example, it is possible to make the variation pattern of the effect or the decorative pattern performed in the liquid crystal display device 16 different between when the setting change process is performed and when it is not performed, or to a higher setting value by the setting change process. It may be different when it is changed and when it is changed to the low setting value, or it may be different when the setting value is changed in multiple steps or more by the setting change process and when it is not changed in more than two steps. It is good.

  Also, during the output period of the setting change security signal described above and the period during which the setting change in progress code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, it is from the start of the setting change processing to the end processing of the setting change processing. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be completely identical.

  Note that the above setting change process is a process that is executed regardless of whether the game permission flag is ON or OFF internally. In addition, when the setting change process in step S24 is started, each time the setting switch is pressed in step S2510, a command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 at a predetermined timing, such as when executing the process of step S2480. Thus, the liquid crystal display device 16, the speaker 24, the lamp 25 and the like may notify the user that the setting is being changed, notify that the set value has been changed, or notify that the setting change has been completed. Good.

[6-1-2-1-1. Backup clear process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the backup clear process of step S 2420 (see FIG. 22). The backup clear process is a process of clearing information stored in the work area of the main RAM 103. However, in the backup clear process, as described above, the information stored in the general work area is cleared, but the information stored in the specific work area is not cleared in principle.

  At step S2421, the main CPU 101 first determines whether the backup clear flag is OFF. When the backup clear flag is OFF (YES in step S2421), main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the backup clear processing, and when the backup clear flag is ON (NO in step S2421), step S2422. Move to

  In step S2422, the main CPU 101 clears the work area of the RWM (main RAM 103). However, if the previous power failure occurred during the setting change processing, there is a possibility that all or part of the backup clear processing is being executed during the setting change processing where the previous power failure occurred. Therefore, if the previous power failure occurs during the setting change processing, the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared along with the backup clear processing executed during the setting change processing where the previous power failure occurred. In this backup clear process, only partial clear may be used.

  In the process of step S2422, as described above, the performance display data and the set value data stored in the specific work area are not cleared in principle. However, when it is determined that the setting value data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal (for example, the setting value data being set is out of the specified range), the setting value data is also cleared. Ru. Further, when it is determined that the performance display data stored in the RWM (main RAM 103) is abnormal, the performance display data is also cleared. In addition, when the set value data is abnormal, the set value data is also cleared, but in that case, the game permission flag is turned OFF and the game permission is performed unless the setting change process (see, for example, FIG. 22) is performed. The flag may not be turned on.

  In step S2423, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that information indicating that the backup clear process has been performed (information indicating that the work area of the main RAM 103 has been cleared) is displayed. Thereafter, in step S2424, the main CPU 101 sets the backup clear flag to OFF, and ends the backup clear process. Note that the notification setting described above is sent as a command to, for example, the sub control circuit 200, and an image indicating that the backup clear processing has been performed is displayed on, for example, the liquid crystal display device 16 by the display control circuit 204 (see FIG. 8).

6-1-2. Setting confirmation process]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process. The setting confirmation process of step S26 (see FIG. 21) is a process for confirming the set value that has been set. The set values that have been set are stored in the main RAM 103.

  First, in step S2610, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S2610), the main CPU 101 ends the process without executing the setting confirmation process.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S2610), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S2620 and performs output setting of the setting confirmation security signal. The setting confirmation security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 320. The setting confirmation security signal is output for a predetermined time or more (for example, 50 msec or more) within the output period of the signal.

  In step S2630, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the setting value information is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. The set value information displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is information indicating set value data being set. For example, when the set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is “3”, “4” corresponding to the set value data “3” is displayed on the performance display monitor 334 as information indicating the set value.

  In step S 2640, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting such that a setting confirmation in progress code indicating that setting confirmation is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thus, the person in charge of the hall can grasp that the setting confirmation process is in progress by confirming the display of the error notification monitor 336.

  At step S2650, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key switch signal is OFF, and if the setting key switch signal is not OFF (NO at step S2650), the process returns to step S2620. That is, in the setting confirmation process, the process of step S2620 to step S2650 is looped (the process of step S2620 to step S2650 is repeated) unless it is determined that the setting key switch signal is ON (unless determined as YES in step S2650). It will be.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key switch signal is OFF (YES in step S2650) in step S2650, the process proceeds to step S2660. After shifting to step S2660, the main CPU 101 ends the processing of steps S2620 to S2650.

  In step S2660, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that the performance display data is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and in step S2670, performs non- notification setting so that no information is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, and setting confirmation processing Finish.

  When the setting confirmation process of step S26 (see FIG. 21) is ended, the setting process of step S20 (see FIG. 18) is ended, and the process returns to the game recovery process of step S30 (see FIG. 18).

6-1-3. Game return processing]
FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the game return process. In the setting process of step S30 (see FIG. 18), on the premise that the game permission flag is ON, a process of returning to a state where the game can be performed is performed. The game return processing will be described below.

  First, in step S31, the main CPU 101 determines whether the game permission flag is ON. If the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31), the main CPU 101 executes the process at the time of abnormality in step S38. The abnormal process will be described later.

  If the game permission flag is ON (YES in step S31), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S32 and performs processing for activating all switches.

  In step S33, the main CPU 101 determines whether the backup clear signal is OFF. When the backup clear signal is OFF (YES in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S34.

  At step S34, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power-off situation identification flag is ON. If the power-off situation identification flag is ON (YES in step S34), the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S35. As described above, the power-off status identification flag is set to ON when power-off occurs during normal gaming (during a game in which neither setting change processing nor setting confirmation processing is performed) or setting confirmation processing. If a power failure occurs during the change process, it is set to OFF. Therefore, when the previous power failure occurs during the normal game or during the setting confirmation process, the process of step S35 is performed.

  In step S35, the main CPU 101 initializes the work area requiring the initial value at the time of power failure recovery.

  Next, in step S36, when the gaming state at the time of power failure recovery is the high probability gaming state, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting indicating that the high probability gaming state is established.

  Next, in step S37, the main CPU 101 performs processing for transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200. This command also includes setting value information on the setting value being set. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game recovery process of step S30 (see FIG. 18), and the series of power on processes end. This makes it possible to execute the game.

  If the main CPU 101 determines in step S33 that the backup clear signal is ON (NO in step S33), the main CPU 101 proceeds to backup clear processing in step S39. This backup clear process is the same as the backup clear process (backup clear process shown in FIG. 23) in step S2420 shown in FIG.

  When the backup clear process in step S39 ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S40, and performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value when initializing the RWM (main RAM 103).

  Next, in step S41, the main CPU 101 performs processing of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the game recovery process of step S30 (see FIG. 18), and the series of power on processes end. This makes it possible to execute the game.

  Also, during the output period of the above setting confirmation security signal and the period when the setting confirmation in-progress code is displayed on the error notification monitor 336, it is from the start of the setting confirmation processing to the end processing of the setting confirmation processing. It has become. However, these periods do not have to be completely identical.

[6-1-3. Error processing]
FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of an abnormal process. The abnormality process of step S38 (see FIG. 25) is executed when it is determined that the game permission flag is OFF (NO in step S31) in the process of step S31 (see FIG. 25) as described above. It is a process.

  First, in step S 381, the main CPU 101 performs processing of transmitting to the sub control circuit 200 an abnormal command indicating that the game permission flag is OFF, that is, that the game can not be executed. Accordingly, it is possible to display information indicating that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not normal on the liquid crystal display device 16 by the control of the sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204).

  In step S382, the main CPU 101 performs output setting of the abnormal security signal. This abnormal security signal is transmitted to the hall computer 700 via the above-mentioned external terminal board 320.

  In step S383, the main CPU 101 performs notification setting so that an error code indicating that execution of the game is not permitted (the game permission flag is OFF) is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. In this way, by confirming the display on the error notification monitor 336, the person in charge of the hole can grasp that the game can not be performed (the game permission flag is OFF).

  In step S384, the main CPU 101 determines whether the power failure detection signal is ON. The power failure detection signal is a signal that is turned on when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection signal is ON (YES in step S384), the process proceeds to step S385, and processing upon power failure is performed. On the other hand, when the power failure detection signal is OFF (NO in step S384), the main CPU 101 loops step S382 to step S384 (the process of step S382 to step S384 is repeated).

[6-1-3-1-1. Processing when a power failure occurs]
FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of processing upon power failure. As described above, the main CPU 101 always checks whether the voltage has dropped to a predetermined level, and when the voltage drops to a predetermined level, it performs processing upon power failure.

  The main CPU 101 first performs interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt processing is not executed (step S3851). Then, the checksum in the work area of the main RAM 103 is calculated, and the calculation result and various game data are stored (saved) in the backup area of the main RAM 103 (step S3852). This checksum is used to check whether the content of the main RAM 103 before the power failure is properly held at the time of power recovery. In this manner, even if the supply of power is stopped, various game data stored in the main RAM 103 can be held.

  Next, the main CPU 101 sets a power failure status identification flag in a backup flag provided in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 (step S3853). That is, as described above, if the main CPU 101 generates power interruption during normal gaming (during a game in which neither the setting change processing nor the setting confirmation processing is performed) or the setting confirmation processing, the main CPU 101 identifies a power interruption status The flag is set to ON, and if it occurs during the setting change process, it is set to OFF.

  After the processing of steps S3851 to S3853, the main CPU 101 proceeds to step S3854, prohibits access to the RWM (main RAM 103), enters an infinite loop, and prepares to stop power supply.

  As described above, when the game permission flag is OFF, the power interruption operation is performed to temporarily stop the supply of power, and the game permission flag is not turned ON unless the setting change process described later is executed. It has become.

  By the way, in this process, it is possible to return from the infinite loop if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power failure or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instant power failure") and the process upon power interruption is started. There is a risk of disappearing. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main CPU 101 of the present embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer (not shown), and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is periodically updated while the processing is being performed normally, but is not updated when processing upon power failure occurs. As a result, processing upon power failure due to a momentary power failure is entered, and even if the infinite loop of FIG. 27 is entered, reset is performed after a predetermined period has elapsed, and the main CPU 101 is activated in the same process as when power is turned on.

  Note that instead of the backup area of the RWM (main RAM 103), a rewritable non-volatile memory (EEPROM or the like) may be provided. In this case, there is an advantage that a constant power supply is not required to back up data.

  Alternatively, the entire area of the RWM (main RAM 103) may be a backup area where data is backed up by constant supply of power. In this case, it is not necessary to save the data stored in the main RAM 103 to another area when the power is shut off. Further, even when the power is restored, it is not necessary to read the save data to the processing area, so the load required for these processes can be reduced.

6-1-4. Flow of power on process seen from the operator side]
The above is the control flow of the power-on process by the main CPU 101, but the flow of the power-on process as viewed from the person who performs the operation (for example, the person in charge of hall or the like) will be briefly described.

6-4-1. Flow of setting change process]
First, setting change processing, that is, a flow for changing set values that have been set will be described. In order to change the set value that has been set, it is first necessary to perform the power-off operation (the OFF operation of the power switch 35). Then, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned ON, and both the pressing operation of the backup clear switch 330 and the ON operation of the power switch 35 are performed.

  When the power switch 35 is turned ON, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operation related to the setting among all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) is activated and the setting change The process is started, and the setting can be changed.

  When the setting change process is started, a setting change in-progress code indicating that the setting change process is in progress is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Furthermore, after the power switch 35 is turned on, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the unlit state to information indicating the set value being set.

  In the setting change process, backup clear process, that is, initialization process of the main RAM 103 (clearing the work area of the main RAM 103, clear notification of the work area of the main RAM 103, initialization of the work area of the main RAM 103, command for initializing RWM) When transmission is performed, the liquid crystal display device 16 displays that the backup processing has been performed.

  In the setting change process, each time the setting switch 332 is pressed, information indicating setting values displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is cyclically displayed. That is, the information indicating the setting value is incremented by one each time the setting switch 332 is pressed when the setting value is "1" to "5", but the setting switch 332 is displayed when the setting value is "6". When is pressed, it is displayed back to "1".

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during the setting change process, the setting change state is ended, and the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 is set. Further, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the code during setting change to the initialization code, the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334, and the operation of all the switches is validated.

  As described above, during the setting change process, only the operation related to the setting (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) of all the switches is enabled, and all the other switches remain disabled. . Then, when the setting key 328 is turned OFF, all the switches are activated.

6-1-4-2. Flow of setting confirmation process]
Next, the setting confirmation process, that is, the flow for confirming the set value being set will be described. The setting confirmation process is a process that is internally executed with the condition that the game permission flag is ON, and is not executed when the game permission flag is internally OFF.

  In order to check the set value that has been set, on the condition that the game permission flag is ON internally, the setting key 328 is turned ON in a state where the power is not turned on, and the backup clear clear switch 330 And the power switch 35 is turned on.

  When the power switch 35 is turned ON, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, only the operation of the setting key 328 among all the switches is activated, the setting confirmation process is started, and the set setting can be confirmed It becomes.

  When the setting confirmation process is started, a setting confirmation code indicating that the setting confirmation process is in progress is displayed on the notification monitor. Furthermore, after the power switch 35 is turned on, the display of the performance display monitor 334 is switched from the unlit state to information indicating the set value being set.

  During the setting confirmation process, even if the setting switch 332 is pressed, the information indicating the setting value displayed on the performance display monitor 334 does not change.

  When the setting key 328 is turned OFF during setting confirmation processing, the setting confirmation state is ended, the display of the error notification monitor 336 is changed from the code during setting confirmation to non-display, and the performance display (base value) is displayed on the performance display monitor 334. Displayed and operation of all switches is enabled.

  As described above, during the setting confirmation process, only the setting key 328 is activated among all the switches, and all the other switches remain inactivated. Therefore, the setting switch 332 also remains disabled. Then, when the setting key 328 is turned OFF, all the switches are activated. As described above, in the setting confirmation process, regardless of the operation of the power switch 35, the process may be executed during the normal game.

[6-1-4-3. Flow in abnormal process]

  As described above, when the game permission flag is internally ON, the setting confirmation process can not be executed although the setting change process can be executed. Therefore, when the game permission flag is ON internally, the same operation as the setting confirmation processing described above (when the power is not turned on, the setting key 328 is turned ON, and the backup clear clear switch 330 is depressed) When the power switch 35 is turned on without performing the setting operation, the process for abnormality is executed instead of the setting confirmation process. The flow in the abnormal processing will be described below.

  After the power switch 35 is turned ON, the operations of all the switches are invalidated, and only the operation related to setting among all the switches (for example, the operation of the setting key 328 and the operation of the setting switch 332) is activated (internal In fact, abnormal processing is started). The reason why the operation related to the setting is enabled is to enable the game permission flag to be turned ON by execution of the setting change process.

  When the abnormal state process is started, an error code indicating that the game can not be performed is displayed on the error notification monitor 336. Thus, the operator can confirm that the game can not be performed. Further, the performance display monitor 334 displays information indicating an error.

  Furthermore, when abnormal processing is started, operations related to setting are also invalidated. That is, the operation of all the switches is invalidated. Therefore, when abnormal processing is started, it does not respond even if any operation is performed, and after the above-mentioned setting change processing is not performed after the power switch 35 is turned OFF, pachinko gaming can be performed Machine 1 can not be recovered. It should be noted that to invalidate the operation of all the switches is a situation where it is impossible to play a game in which each device controlled by the sub control circuit 200 is completely stopped, each device controlled by a part of the sub control circuit 200 (e.g. Lamps include those that are in a controllable state.

6-2. System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S51).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs random number update processing for updating various random number values (step S52).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes switch input detection processing for detecting input signals from various switches (step S353. The switch input detection processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 29).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing for updating the values of various timers (step S54).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs command output processing for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S55).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information output processing of outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S56). The game information is information related to the game processed in the main control circuit 100, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, the hall computer 700. Ru.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing to restore the values of the saved registers (step S57). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

6-2-1. Switch input detection process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a starting opening winning detection process (step S61). The starting opening winning combination detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S62). In the general winning a prize opening passage detection processing, for example, the payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning on the general winning prize openings 53, 54, 55, 56 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening passage detection process (step S63). In the special winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning on the special winning opening 540 is set.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs ball passage detector passage detection processing (step S64). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result of the normal symbol game (based on the detection of passage of the game ball to the passage gate 49 (see, for example, FIG. 4) by the ball passage detector (not shown) Extract random numbers). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the switch input detection process.

6-2-1-1. Start-up mouth winning detection process]
FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the starting hole winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start-up opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (step S71). When the gaming ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 421 (YES in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S52. When the gaming ball is not detected by the first start opening switch 421 (NO in step S71), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S81.

  In step S72, the main CPU 101 performs setting check processing. The setting check process will be described later.

  In step S73, the main CPU 101 performs processing for extracting various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a random number for symbol determination for the first special symbol, and setting payout information according to the first start opening winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first winning opening winnings (number of reserved first special symbols) is less than 4 (step S74). If the pending number is less than 4 (YES in step S74), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S75. If the number of held pieces is four (NO in step S74), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start port 420, and proceeds to the process of step S80.

  In step S75, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding one to the number of first starting hole winnings held.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the first starting opening 420 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (starting condition) of the first special symbol is satisfied. Perform (step S76). Thereby, the variable display of the first special symbol of the extracted random number is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a first special stop symbol determination process (step S77). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the big hit random number determination table for the first special symbol, the symbol determination table and the big hit type determination based on the jackpot determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the first special symbol With reference to the table, the symbol specifying command, the hit selection symbol command and the like according to the main symbol (the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S78). The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the above-described start opening winning combination detection process. Further, the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14), and as a result of the big hit determination, selects the variation pattern based on the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value. Perform the process to determine.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 12 and FIG. 14, since the variation display time of the decorative symbol is stored in association with the variation pattern, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process The pattern specification command is substantially information that can represent the variation time.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a hold number increase command of the first starting opening winning combination (step S79). The first start opening winning combination hold number increase command is a command indicating that the hold number of the first special symbol is to be increased by 1, and to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S78. Will be sent.

  In step S80, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a pending number overflow command for the first starting hole winning, and then proceeds to step S81. The reserve number overflow command for the first starting hole winning combination is a command indicating that there is a first starting aperture winning when the number of reserved first special symbols is the upper limit (for example, four), to the sub control circuit 200 Will be sent.

  As is clear from FIG. 30, the fact that the pending number overflow command for the first starting hole winning is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 is determined because the setting value data is normal in the setting check process of step S72 described later. The premise is that

  In step S81, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (step S81). When the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S82. When the game ball is not detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (NO in step S81), the main CPU 101 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

  In step S82, the main CPU 101 performs setting check processing. The setting check process will be described later, but is the same process as step S72.

  In step S83, the main CPU 101 performs processing for extracting various random numbers such as a big hit determination random number and a random number for symbol determination for the second special symbol and setting payout information according to the second start opening winning combination.

  Next, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved second starting hole winnings (number of reserved second special symbols) is less than 4 (step S84). If the pending number is less than 4 (YES in step S84), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S85. If the number of held pieces is four (NO in step S84), the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440, and ends the starting opening winning detection process.

  In step S85, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding one to the number of holdings of the second starting opening winning.

  Next, the main CPU 101 stores the various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 440 in the main RAM 103 until the variation start condition (starting condition) of the second special symbol is satisfied. Perform (step S86). Thereby, the variable display of the second special symbol of the extracted random number is suspended until the start condition is satisfied.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S87). Similarly to the first special stop symbol determination processing, the second special stop symbol determination processing is also the second special symbol based on the extracted big hit determination random number value and the symbol determination random number value extracted for the second special symbol. With reference to the big hit random number determination table, the symbol determination table, and the big hit type determination table for, the symbol designation command and the big hit selection symbol command etc concerning the main symbol (the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed) are determined.

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing (step S88). Similar to step S78, this variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during execution of the above-described start-up winning game detection process, and the main CPU 101 refers to the variation time determination table of the special symbol in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14). Then, as a result of the jackpot determination, processing of selecting the variation pattern is performed based on the reach determination random number value and the effect selection random number value.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a hold number increase command of the second starting opening winning combination (step S89). The reserve number increase command for the second starting opening winning combination is a command indicating that the reserve number of the second special symbol is to be increased by one, and to the sub control circuit 200 together with the command indicating the variation pattern determined in the process of step S88. Will be sent. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the starting opening winning detection process.

  If the game ball win for the first start port 420 and the game ball win for the second start port 440 are simultaneously detected, either of the setting check process of step S72 and the setting check process of step S82 is performed. Only one or the other may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 441 (YES in step S81), it is assumed that the number of pending positions for second starting opening winning is 4 (NO in step S84). Also, the main CPU 101 discards various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 440 without transmitting the reserved number overflow command of the second start port winning to the sub control circuit 200 and starts the start. The mouth winning detection process has ended. This is because the setting value suggestion effect to be described later can be effectively performed when it is in the non-time saving game state.

6-2-1-1-1. Setting check process]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting check process by the main CPU 101, and the setting check process is the same process as step S72 and step S82 (both are shown in FIG. 30). The setting check process is a process of checking whether the set value being set is normal. In this setting check process, for example, a process similar to the work area check of the RWM (main RAM 103) executed in step S1720 (see FIG. 20) may be performed, but in the present embodiment, the set value is set. Emphasis is placed on checking whether it is normal or not.

  As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 first checks in step S721 whether set value data stored in the main RAM 103 is appropriate (for example, within a prescribed range). As described above, in the present embodiment, “0” to “5” are stored in the main RAM 103 as the set value data corresponding to the set values “1” to “6”. It is determined whether it is within the range of 0 "to" 5 ". If the set value data is in the range of “0” to “5” (YES in step S721), the setting check process is ended. If the set value data is out of the range of “0” to “5” (NO in step S721), the process proceeds to step S722.

  In step S722, the main CPU 101 sets the game permission flag to OFF, and proceeds to step S723.

  In step S723, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is variably displayed. If the main CPU 101 determines that the special symbol is in a variable display (YES in step S723), it moves to step S724, and if it determines that the special symbol is not in a variable display (NO in step S723), it moves to step S725.

  In step S 724, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stopping of the special symbol during the variable display. That is, even if the variation time of the special symbol determined in step S78 or step S88 (refer to FIG. 30) with reference to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14), The variation display of the special symbol is continued, and the special symbol is not displayed stopped. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S726.

  For example, when the game ball is won in the starting opening 542, 440 while the variation display of the special symbol is being performed by the main CPU 101, the step during the variation display of the special symbol (before the variation display of the special symbol is finished) The setting check process of S72 (or step S82) may be performed. If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even if the special symbol is being displayed in a variable display (the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the variable display is not displayed ), The game permission flag is turned off, and an abnormal process is executed. In this case, since the game can not be executed unless the power is turned off and the setting change process is not executed, the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in the variable display is cleared in the backup clear process including the pending data. The Rukoto.

  At step S726, the main CPU 101 prohibits the game ball from being fired. That is, control is performed so that the supply / discharge control circuit (see FIG. 8) does not supply power to the discharge solenoid (not shown). Therefore, even if the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates in the clockwise direction, the gaming ball is not fired and it is impossible to play a game.

  When the main CPU 101 prohibits the game ball from being fired in step S 726, the main CPU 101 shifts to an abnormal processing in step S 727.

  In step S725, the main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the special symbol so that the next new variable display is not started. For example, when the special symbol is not in the variable display, the variable display of the special symbol is suspended, or even if the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and the start of the next variable display is awaited, the variable display of the special symbol is started I will not. When the main CPU 101 ends the process of step S725, the process proceeds to step S726.

  In the abnormal state process of step S727, the main CPU 101 performs the same process as the abnormal state process of step S38 (see FIG. 25). That is, the processing of steps S381 to S384 shown in FIG. 26 is performed until the power failure detection signal ON is detected, and when the power failure detection signal ON is detected, the processing upon power failure occurrence of step S385, that is, the diagram. The processes of steps S3851 to S3854 shown in 27 are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed at the time of winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 420 and at the time of winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 440. If the stored set value data is not normal, execution of the game is prohibited. Therefore, even while the game is being performed, if the set value data is not normal, it is impossible to continue playing the game, unless the power is turned off once and the power is turned on again to perform the setting change process, I can not play a game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued, for example, in a state where the setting is not normal.

  Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the set value data is not appropriate in step S721, the power is turned off and the power is turned on again as described above, even if the variation display of the special symbol is suspended without being started yet. Since the game can not be performed unless the setting change process is performed by inserting the game, various data (for example, a jackpot determination random number) stored in the main RAM 103 regarding the suspension are all cleared. That is, regardless of whether the various data being held are based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 or the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440, all It is cleared. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing from being performed based on the set values that are not normal for the various data related to the suspension, and it is possible to improve security.

  Further, as described above, in the setting check process, the same process is performed in step S72 and step S82 (both refer to FIG. 30). Therefore, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 420 (NO in step S721), the main CPU 101 in step S724. The symbol prohibits the stop of the second special symbol during the variable display, not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 440 (NO in step S721), in step S724, Not only when the special symbol in the variable display is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol, the main CPU 101 prohibits the stopping of the first special symbol in the variable display.

  Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S72) performed when the gaming ball has won in the first starting opening 420 (NO in step S721), in step S725 The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the second special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the first special symbol but also when it is the second special symbol. Similarly, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process (step S82) performed when the gaming ball has won in the second starting opening 440 (NO in step S721), in step S725, The main CPU 101 prohibits the variable display of the first special symbol not only when the special symbol for which the variable display is held is the second special symbol but also when it is the first special symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the setting check process is performed when the game ball is won to the first start port 420 and the second start port 440 other than when the power is turned on (see step S1730 in FIG. 20) For example, during setting confirmation processing (refer to step S24 in FIG. 21), during setting change processing (refer to step S26 in FIG. 21), when backup clear processing is executed (refer to FIG. 23), variation display of special symbols starts When the special symbol is stopped, the passage gate switch 49a (see Fig. 8) detects passing, the normal symbol starts changing, the normal symbol stops changing, etc. The setting check process is triggered by a predetermined timing. You may do so. The above-mentioned predetermined timing is an exemplary listing. The setting check process may be performed not only at a specific timing as a trigger but also at a plurality of timings (for example, all or part of the above timings). Even in such a case, it is possible to prevent, for example, the game from being continued while the setting is not normal.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process, it is impossible to immediately set the game permission flag OFF to advance the game regardless of whether or not the big hit gaming state is in progress. Although this is made possible, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing at which it is determined that the setting value data is not normal in the setting check process may be shifted from the timing at which execution of the game is disabled. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of loss that may occur due to the fact that the variation display is not performed even though the game ball has won in the first starting opening 420 or the second starting opening 440. However, since it is not preferable that various determination processing (for example, big hit determination processing etc.) is performed in a state where the set value data is not normal, the various symbols are not displayed, and after performing special symbol fluctuation display for a predetermined time, It is preferable to stop the special symbol with a loss.

  Although not shown in FIG. 31, when the game permission flag is set to OFF in step S722, it is preferable to prohibit the normal symbol from being stopped if the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. . In addition, when the normal symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, it is preferable to prohibit the variable display of the normal symbol.

6-3. Main control main processing]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing main control main processing by the main CPU 101. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S91). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs processing such as the above-described power-on processing.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol control processing (step S93). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol control processing (step S94). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs symbol display section control processing (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 selects the special symbol display section (the first special symbol display section 73, according to the result of the special symbol control processing and the result of the normal symbol control processing stored in the main RAM 103 in step S93 and step S94. A process of storing control signals for driving the second special symbol display section 74) and the normal symbol display section 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. Thereby, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display display unit (the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol (first special) The symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs game information data generation processing (step S96). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to game information data to be sent to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / fire control circuit 300, and the hall computer 700, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 103.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs storage and gaming state data generation processing (step S97). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / playing state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time saving flag, and stores the storage / playing state data in the main RAM 103. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 returns to the process of step S92.

[6-3-1. Special symbol control process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. Note that numerical values ("00" to "08") described in parentheses at the left of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. The control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing processing in accordance with the numerical value of the control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a control state flag (step S101). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S102 to S110 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. The control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in steps S102 to S110 to be performed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time or the like set for each process of steps S102 to S110. Note that before this predetermined timing is reached, processing relating to another subroutine is performed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-mentioned system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage check processing (step S102). In this process, when the control status flag is a value ("00") indicating the special symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending displays of the variation display of the special symbol, and the pending number is not "0". In the case where there is a holding ball, as a result of the big hit determination obtained in the starting opening winning combination detection process, the determination result of the main symbol, the determination result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, etc. are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating a special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process The variation display time of the corresponding special symbol is set to the waiting time timer. That is, after the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the starting opening winning combination detection process has elapsed, the below-mentioned special symbol variation time management process is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the number of held items is “0” (when there is no holding ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. The special symbol storage check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol variation time management processing (step S103). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control status flag is a value indicating the special symbol variation time management process ("01"), and the variation symbol display time of the special symbol has passed. A value ("02") indicating the display time management process (step S104) is set, and the waiting time after decision is set in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S103, a special symbol display time management process described later is set to be executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol display time management processing (step S104). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control condition flag is a value indicating the special symbol display time management process (“02”), and when the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S103 has elapsed, the big hit determination Determine whether the result is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating a big hit start interval management process (step S105) described later in the control state flag, and sets the big hit start interval. The corresponding time is set in the latency timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit determination is not "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("08") indicating a special symbol game end process (step S110) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set to execute a special symbol game end process described later. The special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit start interval management process (step S105). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating the big hit start interval management process (“03”), and the time corresponding to the big hit start interval set in the process of step S104 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a control status flag to a value ("04") indicating a process for opening a special winning opening (step S106), which will be described later. 30 seconds) is set to the special winning opening opening time timer. That is, it is set by this process that a special winning opening open processing described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening open process (step S106). In this process, first, the main CPU 101 sets the condition that the number of big winning opening winning counters is equal to or more than the predetermined number when the control status flag is the value ("04") indicating the big winning opening opening processing, and It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the special winning opening open time timer is “0”) is satisfied (a predetermined closing condition is satisfied). If one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the special winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("05") indicating the big winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107) described later in the control status flag, and sets the big winning opening residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. Do. That is, by this processing, after the special winning opening internal residual ball monitoring time set in step S107 has elapsed, it is set to execute the special winning opening internal residual ball monitoring processing described later. Note that an inter-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the special winning opening open processing.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S107). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control status flag is a value ("05") indicating the residual ball monitoring process in the special winning opening, and the residual ball monitoring time in the special winning opening has elapsed. It is determined whether the condition that the value is equal to or more than the maximum value of the number of times of opening of the special winning opening (the final round) is satisfied. When determining that the above condition is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the special winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a time corresponding to the inter-round interval in the waiting time timer. That is, by this processing, after the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has elapsed, it is set so that the waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening described later is executed. On the other hand, when determining in step S107 that the above condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("07") indicating the big hit end interval processing in the control state flag, and the time corresponding to the big hit end interval (big hit end interval Set time) to the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the big hit end interval set in this process has elapsed, it is set so that the big hit end interval process described later is executed.

  Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is not greater than or equal to the maximum value of the special winning opening opening frequency, it performs waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening (step S108). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control status flag is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval has passed, the big winning opening is opened. The value of the number counter is updated so as to increase "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a process for opening a special winning opening in a control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the open upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the special winning opening open time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned special winning opening open process (step S106) is set to be executed again. It is to be noted that a special winning opening open display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 immediately before the end of the special winning opening pre-reopening waiting time management process.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the special winning opening opening frequency, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit end interval process (step S109). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the control state flag is a value ("07") indicating the big hit end interval process and the special symbol game end process is executed when the time corresponding to the big hit end interval has elapsed (" Set 08 ") in the control status flag. That is, this process is set to execute the special symbol game end process described later after the process of step S109. In addition, when the main symbol mentioned above is any of special figure 1-2, special figure 18, and special figure 22, main CPU101 performs control which shifts a game state to a high probability game state, and the main mentioned above When the symbol is any one of the special drawing 1-1, the special drawing 1-3 and the special drawing 21, control is performed to set the gaming state to the low probability gaming state (probable change flag OFF).

  Next, when the big hit gaming state ends, or when the result of the big hit determination is "loss", the main CPU 101 performs special symbol game end processing (step S110). In this process, when the control state flag is the value indicating the special symbol game end process ("08"), the main CPU 101 updates the memory indicating the number of held pieces (starting storage information) to decrease by "1". Do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable display of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("00") indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, the special symbol storage check process (step S102) described above is set to be executed after the process of step S110. When the special symbol game end process is ended, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the special symbol game is advanced by sequentially setting various values in the control state flag. Specifically, when the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state, and the result of the big hit determination is "loss", the main CPU 101 sets the control status flag to "00", "01", "02", "08". Set in order. Thus, the main CPU 101 executes the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104), and the special symbol game end process (step S110). Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing.

  Further, when the gaming state is not the big hit gaming state and the result of the big hit determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control status flag in the order of "00", "01", "02", "03" Do. Thereby, the main CPU 101 performs the special symbol storage check process (step S102), the special symbol variation time management process (step S103), the special symbol display time management process (step S104), and the big hit start interval management process (step S105). Are executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and transition control to the jackpot gaming state is executed.

  Furthermore, when transition control to the big hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag in the order of “04”, “05”, and “06”. Thereby, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned process for opening the special winning opening (step S106), the process of monitoring the remaining balls in the special winning opening (step S107) and the process for managing waiting time before the reopening of the special winning opening (step S108) It executes at a predetermined timing and executes a big hit gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state, when the termination condition of the big hit gaming state is satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets the control status flag in the order of “04”, “05”, “07”, and “08”. Thereby, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned special winning opening open processing (step S106), the special winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S107), the big hit end interval processing (step S109) and the special symbol game ending processing (step S110). Is executed in this order at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state is ended.

  As described above, in the special symbol control process, the processing flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 39 described later) in step S94 in the main control main process shown in FIG. 32 also branches the processing flow according to the status, as in the special symbol control process.

  The processing program of this embodiment is programmed so that a pure return processing from the small module to the parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above process.

6-3-1-1. Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol storage check process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by load processing (step S111).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating a special symbol storage check process (step S112). If it is determined that the control state flag is not "00" (NO in step S112), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00" (YES in step S112), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S113.

  In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of held second start opening winnings (variation display of the second special symbol) (the second start storage number) is "0". If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved second starting hole wins is “0” (YES in step S113), the process proceeds to step S114, and it is determined that the number of reserved second starting mouth wins is not “0”. When it discriminate | determines (NO in step S113), it moves to the process of step S121.

  In step S114, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of held first start opening winnings (variation display of the first special symbol) is “0”. If the main CPU 101 determines that the number of reserved first starting hole wins is not "0" (NO in step S114), the process proceeds to step S115, and it is determined that the number of first starting mouth wins is "0". When it discriminate | determines (YES in step S114), it moves to the process of step S120.

  In step S115, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the first starting memory number corresponding to the number of first starting hole winnings held. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol being displayed or being changed. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in the variable display is stored as start memory information. And, in the first special symbol starting memory area (1) ~ the first special symbol starting memory area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the first special symbol for 4 times being held Data (information) is stored as start memory information. The start memory information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random number value or symbol determination random number value extracted at the time of winning of the first start opening 420, a determined variation pattern, etc. Is included.

  Next, in step S116, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing based on the first start hole winning. In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. Thereafter, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S117.

  In step S117, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variation time management processing in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

  In step S118, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot determination process. In this process, main CPU 101 is extracted when winning opening winning, and is a random number value for jackpot determination previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0) Based on the jackpot determination table (not shown) corresponding to the type of winning start opening, the determination value data is acquired. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (big hit determination) whether it is a "big hit" or a "losing" based on the acquired determination value data.

  Next, in step S119, the main CPU 101 sets a variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern of the special symbol determined in the variation pattern determination process of step S78 or step S88 (both are shown in FIG. 30) in the waiting time timer. . When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  Further, in step S120, the main CPU 101 performs a demonstration display process for displaying a demonstration screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

  Further, in step S121, the main CPU 101 subtracts “1” from the value of the second starting memory number corresponding to the number of pending second starting hole wins. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display or pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in the variable display is stored as start memory information. And, in the second special symbol starting memory area (1)-the second special symbol starting memory area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol for 4 times being held Data (information) is stored as start memory information. The start memory information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a jackpot determination random number value or symbol determination random number value extracted at the time of winning of the second start port 440, a determined variation pattern, etc. Is included.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs special symbol storage transfer processing based on the second start opening winning combination (step S122). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S117, executes the processes of steps S118 and S119, and then ends the special symbol storage check process.

6-3-2. Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value ("02") indicating a special symbol display time management process (step S131). If it is determined that the control state flag is not the value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process (NO in step S131), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is the value ("02") indicating the special symbol display time management process (YES in step S131), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S132.

  In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer (waiting time) is “0”. In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time after the fluctuation display determination set in the waiting time timer (the fluctuation display start waiting time) is digested. If it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S132), the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S132), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S133.

  In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol game is a "big hit". If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S134. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S133), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S140.

  In step S134, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit flag indicating a big hit. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S135.

  In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs processing to clear the time saving number counter, and the time saving flag and the probability change flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S136.

  In step S136, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set a value (“03”) indicating the big hit start interval management processing in the control state flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big hit start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S137).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a big hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S138). As a result, a big hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the big hit type determination table (see FIG. 11, FIG. 15 or FIG. 16), and the round number upper limit value (big winning opening open number upper limit value) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command). ) Is set in the main RAM 103, and the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S139). The number-of-rounds display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

  In step S140, the main CPU 101 performs time-savings subtraction processing. At this time, the short time subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end processing in the control state flag (step S141). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

6-3-2-1. Time reduction processing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing time-subtractive number subtraction processing by the main CPU 101. The time reduction processing is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol display time management processing described above or the big hit end interval processing described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the time reduction counter is 0 or not (step S151). The time saving counter is a subtraction counter that counts until the set time saving count reaches zero. If the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (YES in step S151), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S151), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number reducing process. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the number of times set as the time reduction number counter is 100 times or 10000 times.

  In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the time saving number counter.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines again whether or not the value of the time reduction number counter is 0 (step S153). If the value of the time saving number counter is 0 (YES in step S153), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S154. If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0 (NO in step S153), the main CPU 101 ends the time saving number subtraction process.

  In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set "0" as the time saving flag. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the time-savings subtraction process.

6-3-2. Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the big hit end interval process by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (step S161). If it is determined that the control state flag is not the value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process. On the other hand, when the control state flag is determined to be the value (“07”) indicating the big hit end interval process (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S162.

  In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the big hit end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been consumed. If it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0” (NO in step S161), the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the waiting time timer is “0” (YES in step S161), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S163.

  In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the special winning opening open count display LED pattern flag. The special winning opening open count display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the round number at the time of the big hit by the light emission pattern of the LED.

  Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). The round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and indicates whether or not the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times during one round. Is the flag of When the special winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is “1”. Also at this time, the main CPU 101 transmits a special symbol big hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end processing in the control state flag (step S165).

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). If it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit" (YES in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S167. On the other hand, when determining that the special symbol game is not a "big hit" (NO in step S166), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S174.

  In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs processing for setting the big hit flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to ON.

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a definite variation big hit (step S168). If it is a definite variation big hit (YES in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S169. When it is not a definite variation big hit (NO in step S168), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S171.

  In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs processing to set "1" as the probability change flag.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a prescribed number of time reductions in the time reduction number counter (step S172). In the present embodiment, referring to the big hit type determination table (FIG. 11, FIG. 15, or FIG. 16), when it is a big hit (time to special number 1-1, to special year 1-3, special to 21) Set 100 times in the time reduction counter, and when it is a big hit (special figure 1-2, special figure 18, special figure 22) which continues the time reduction until the next big hit gaming state is executed 10000 times in the time reduction counter set. However, the time reduction counter, which is set when the time reduction continues until the next big hit gaming state is executed, is not limited to 10000 times, even if the game is continued from opening the hall to closing the store It is sufficient if the number can not occur in reality. As described above, even if the game is continued from the opening of the hall to the closing of the store, by setting the number of times which can not actually occur in the time reduction counter, the time reduction continues substantially until the next big hit gaming state is executed. It will be done. Furthermore, when it is a big hit of 100 time saving times, the counter processing is performed (100 times are set to the time saving number counter), and when it is a big hit where time saving continues until the next big hit gaming state is executed (As long as the time saving flag is ON, the time saving game state may be continued).

  Next, the main CPU 101 executes fluctuation pattern table setting processing (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

  In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs processing for clearing the big hit flag, that is, processing for setting the big hit flag set to ON in the predetermined area of the main RAM 34 to OFF.

  In step S175, the main CPU 101 executes the above-described time reduction processing of subtraction (step S175). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the big hit end interval process.

6-3-2-1. Fluctuation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing variation pattern table setting processing by the main CPU 101. The fluctuation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on process or the big hit end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is on (step S181). If the power is on (YES in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S182. If the power is not on (NO in step S181), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S183.

  In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14). Table pattern 1 corresponds to the table pattern when both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are ON (both big hit and lost) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14) .

  Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the time saving flag is ON (step S183). If the time saving flag is ON (YES in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S184. If the time saving flag is OFF (NO in step S183), the main CPU 101 proceeds to the process of step S185.

  In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. Table pattern 2 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is OFF (both the big hit and the loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14).

  In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14). When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process. The table pattern 3 corresponds to the table pattern when the time saving flag is ON (both the big hit and the loss) in the variation time determination table of the special symbol shown in FIG. 12 (or FIG. 14).

6-4. Normal symbol control process]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing normal symbol control processing by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values ("00" to "04") written in parentheses at the left of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 39 indicate normal symbol control status flags, and the normal symbol control status flags indicate the main RAM 103. Are stored in a predetermined storage area. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the value of the normal symbol control state flag.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the main CPU 101 performs processing for loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later, based on the read value of the normal symbol control state flag. The normal symbol control state flag indicates the game state of the normal symbol game, and enables execution of any one of the processes in steps S162 to S166. Further, main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined in accordance with the waiting time or the like set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before this predetermined timing is reached, other subroutine processing is executed without executing each processing. Of course, the above-mentioned system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 28) is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol storage check processing (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("00") indicating a normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending display of the variation display of the normal symbol, and the pending number is "0". If not, processing such as a big hit judgment is performed. Further, in this processing, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing (step S193) described later to the normal symbol control state flag, and the fluctuation time determined in the current processing Set to the waiting time timer. That is, after the variation time of the determined normal symbol has passed by the process of step S192, it is set so that the below-mentioned normal symbol variation time monitoring process is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring processing (step S193). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("01") indicating normal symbol change time monitoring processing, and the normal symbol control state flag is described later when the normal symbol change time has elapsed. A value ("02") indicating a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and a waiting time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, in the process of step S193, after the waiting time after being set has elapsed, it is set such that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol display time monitoring processing (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (“02”), and when the waiting time after determination set in the process of step S193 has elapsed, the big hit It is determined whether the result of the determination is a "big hit". Then, when the result of the big hit judgment is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs the ordinary electric symbol opening setting process, and indicates the ordinary electric symbol opening process (step S195) described later in the ordinary symbol control state flag (step S195) Set "03"). That is, by this processing, it is set so that the below-mentioned normal motor-operated combination release processing is executed. On the other hand, if the result of the big hit determination is not a "big hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("04") indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set such that a normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

  Next, when it is determined in step S194 that the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit", the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric jack combination open process (step S195). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("03") indicating the normal motor combination release processing, the main CPU 101 has said that a predetermined number of winnings have been made during the opening of the common motor combination 460. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the normal motor-operated part 460 has passed (the normal electric power releasing time timer is “0”) is satisfied. If one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates a variable located in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (see, for example, FIG. 4) of the ordinary motor-operated product 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating a normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later to the normal symbol control state flag. That is, by this processing, it is set so that the below-mentioned normal symbol game end processing is executed.

  Next, the main CPU 101 performs normal symbol game end processing (step S196). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value indicating the normal symbol game end processing ("04"), the main CPU 101 decreases the data indicating the number of pending displays of the variable display of the normal symbol by "1". Update to memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform variable display of the next normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value ("00") indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-described normal symbol storage check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process ends, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[7. Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 executes the sub control circuit main processing. The sub control circuit main processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing by the sub CPU 201. The sub control circuit main process is a process started when the power is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 40, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup recovery initialization and the like (step S201).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing to clear the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). The watchdog timer is set to have a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) at the time of start-up, and the power-off process is performed when the service pulse is not written (at time-out).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes operation means input processing (step S203).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command analysis processing (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes an effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process is a process of determining an effect mode to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 100.

  The effect mode determined in the above effect mode determination process (step S205) also includes a setting indication effect that suggests the set value being set. The setting suggestion effect will be described by taking a first example and a second example.

(First example)
The first example of the setting suggestion effect is performed on the condition that the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 4) is performed beyond the holding upper limit. For example, the sub CPU 201 counts the first start winning opening overflow point, and when the hold number overflow command of the first starting winning combination is transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the first start winning opening overflow point is incremented by one. Do. Then, when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, 50 points), the main CPU 101 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be executed in the effect mode determination process described above. In the non-time-saving game state in which the time-shortening flag is off, such as the normal game state, it is not easy to win the game ball to the first starting hole 420, therefore, the player's discouragement can not be made . Therefore, it is possible to suppress discouragement of the player without giving a direct loss to the hall by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the first start winning opening overflow has occurred in the non-time-short game state. It becomes possible. In addition, some players stop the firing of the game ball when the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 420 is the hold limit. In this regard, it is also possible to promote the game by performing the setting suggestion effect on the condition that the winning of the gaming ball of the first starting opening 420 exceeds the holding upper limit.

  In the first example of the setting suggestion effect described above, although the setting suggestion effect is performed when the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the first starting opening winning combination The setting suggestion effect may be performed when the hold count overflow command is transmitted from the main control circuit 100. In this case, since the frequency of execution of the setting suggestion effect becomes high, for example, it is preferable that the effect is difficult to estimate the setting by performing the setting suggestion effect only once. For example, although it is difficult to infer the setting only with information obtained from one setting suggestion effect, it becomes possible to infer the setting by collecting a plurality of information obtained from a plurality of setting suggestion effects. It is conceivable to do so.

  In addition, as described above, it is premised that it is determined that the setting value data is normal in the setting check process of step S72 that the pending number overflow command of the first starting opening winning combination is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200. is there. Therefore, even if it is not determined that the setting value data is normal in the setting check process, even if the game ball winning to the first starting port 420 (see, for example, FIG. 4) is performed beyond the holding upper limit. , And the sub CPU 201 does not perform addition to the first start winning opening overflow point. Therefore, under circumstances where the first start winning opening overflow point reaches a predetermined point (for example, a predetermined point), when the game ball winning to the first starting opening 420 (for example, see FIG. 4) is performed beyond the holding upper limit. The setting check process of step S72 (FIG. 30) when the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 420 (see, for example, FIG. 4) is performed beyond the holding upper limit at 49 points with respect to 50 points). If it is determined that the sub CPU 201 is not normal, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S 722, which will be described later) without making a setting suggestion effect by the sub CPU 201 (step S722 described later). .

  Further, in the first example of the setting suggestion effect described above, although the setting suggestion effect is not performed even if the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 440 (see, for example, FIG. 4) is performed beyond the holding upper limit 30), same as when the winning of the game ball to the first starting hole 420 exceeds the holding upper limit on condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 440 exceeds the holding upper limit It may be possible to perform a suggestive effect.

(Second example)
The second example of the setting suggestion effect is performed when a game ball is won in a specific winning opening during execution of reach effect. For example, at the start of the reach effect, the sub CPU 201 may select, for example, a specific winning opening among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (for example, see FIG. 4). Randomly determined by lottery. Then, when the winning command of the game ball to the specific winning opening determined above is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 during execution of the reach effect, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed. For example, among players, there is a player who interrupts the firing of a game ball when a reach effect having a long fluctuation time is executed. Therefore, by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the winning detection of the gaming ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect, it becomes possible to promote the launch of the game ball even during the reach effect . In addition, it may be immediately recognized that the degree of expectation is low at the time when the reach production is started. In such a case, for the player, the fluctuation display does not start next until the reach effect is finished, and the interest may decrease. In this regard, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest by executing the setting suggestion effect based on the detection of the winning of the gaming ball to the specific winning opening during the execution of the reach effect. Moreover, if the manager of the gaming machine can set the setting value, the player may become suspicious that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine that he / she is playing is low. According to the example of (1), such fear can be reduced and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned specific winning a prize opening is randomly determined, for example, by lottery from among the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440 and the respective general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (for example, refer to FIG. 4) It is preferable to make it secret without disclosing which is a specific winning opening. As a result, the player has an interest in selecting which winning opening to aim at.

  Further, in the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the above-mentioned specific winning opening is one of the first starting opening 420, the second starting opening 440, and each of the general winning openings 53, 54, 55 (all refer to, for example, FIG. 4). Among them, for example, random determination is made by lottery, but it is not necessarily limited to randomly determining a specific winning opening, and a fixed winning opening may be used as the specific winning opening.

  In each of the first example and the second example of the setting suggestion effect, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed. However, the main CPU 101 may decide to execute the setting suggestion effect.

  In addition, when a game ball is won in a specific winning opening during execution of reach effect, if the specific winning opening is a starting opening, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 (all refer to FIG. 30) is performed. It will be. The setting suggestion effect in this case is performed only when it is determined that the setting checking process is normal (YES in step S721). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not normal in the setting check process described above (NO in step S721), it not only does not perform the setting suggestion effect but also prohibits stopping the special symbol during the variable display by the process of step S734. Do. In addition, with regard to the sub CPU 201, even if the variation design of the decoration symbol accompanied by the reach production is being performed, the variation design of the decoration symbol is continued. However, the sub CPU 201 may stop the output of the sound effect by the sound control circuit 205, or may decrease the output volume.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes command transmission processing (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the display control circuit 204 executes drawing control processing (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes voice control processing (step S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the lamp control circuit 206 executes a lamp control process (step S209). In this process, the lamp control circuit 206 performs light emission control to light or blink the lamp 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

  Next, the character control circuit 207 executes a character control process (step S210). In this process, the character control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor for operating the movable role unit based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub control circuit main process, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed after the initialization process of step S201 is completed.

7-1. Command analysis process]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing command analysis processing by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, after receiving from the main control circuit 100 (main CPU 101), the sub CPU 201 performs processing of analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 203 (step S241).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs consistency check on the received command (step S242). The integrity check is performed to verify that the target data is present upon command reception and that the data is free of errors or omissions.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a fluctuation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects the effect pattern by lottery based on the fluctuation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items pertaining to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of effect (presence of serif announcement, presence or absence of SU notice, etc.) as the effect pattern The contents of the effect (type of effect, type of cut-in, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information in another process separately subroutineted. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

7-2. Command transmission process]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing command transmission processing by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the sub control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, when transmitting control commands (messages) to the control circuits 204 to 207, the sub CPU 201 executes message setting processing (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect specification information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a direct table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the corresponding direct table in a predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 201 executes message transmission processing (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and transmits the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG.

7-2-1. Message setting process]
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs setting of devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for setting the presence or absence of the system operation (step S262).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs setting of stage information and each piece of presentation information (step S263).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 sets a notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores devices (control circuits 204 to 207) as destinations of transmission, presence / absence of system operation, stage information and effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

7-2-2. Direct table registration process]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing direct table registration processing by the sub CPU 201. The direct table registration process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a single table (step S271).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determining process (step S272).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering a slave table to be used in the master table (step S273).

  Next, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S 274). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the direct table registration process.

7-2-3. Message sending process]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing a message transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is transmitted (step S281).

  Next, after completing the transmission of the message, the sub CPU 201 performs processing for discarding the unnecessary direct table (step S282). When this process ends, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[8. Scalability of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment]
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, depending on the set value being set, the jackpot probability, the reach probability, the variation time of the special symbol, the selection rate of the main symbol (number of rounds, probability change rush rate, time shortening Although the rush rate is changed, it is not necessary to change all of them according to the set value, and only one or more of them may be changed according to the set value.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 71 is a predetermined mode (a mode of “normal hit”), the normal motorized role 46 is predetermined. Only from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, the player may be notified of the timing at which the ordinary electric role product 46 changes from the closing state to the opening state, and the timing at which the opening state changes to the closing state (i.e., the timing at which the game ball is fired). In this case, the frequency of notifying the launch timing of the game ball may be changed according to the set value (the notification frequency of the launch timing may be increased as the set value increases).

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the backup clear process (for example, step S39) is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is cleared. This backup clear process is always performed even when the setting change process (step S24) is performed. Therefore, when the backup process is performed, the data stored in the general work area of the work area of the main RAM 103 is always performed. It is cleared. However, instead of this, the clear address range of the main RAM 103 in which data is cleared by the backup clear processing performed when the setting change processing is performed and the backup clear processing performed without the setting change processing is performed. You may make it differ. For example, after the big hit gaming state is over, until the predetermined number of games are executed (until the special symbol is displayed the predetermined number of times is changed), the high probability gaming state is set, and after the predetermined number of games are finished, it is low. In a pachinko gaming machine (a pachinko gaming machine called a "ST machine") that shifts to the probability gaming state, the setting change process is performed when the high probability gaming state is being controlled (before execution of a predetermined number of games is finished) When the backup clear process is performed without being set, the positive change flag is set to OFF, and when the backup clear process is performed along with the execution of the setting change process, the ON setting of the positive change flag is continued (the rest of the high probability gaming state A memory of the number of games may be kept). Furthermore, when backup clear processing is performed along with the execution of the setting change processing, the ON setting of the probability change flag is continued when it is set to the same setting value as the previous time, and when it is set to the setting value different from the previous time In this case, the probability change flag may be set to OFF.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in each round game in the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening 540 is open when the count of gaming balls having won the big winning opening 540 reaches 10 balls, When the time of 30 sec. Is reached and either one of the conditions is met, the state is closed. Therefore, in each round game in the big hit game state, the condition for the big winning opening 540 to be closed from the open state may be changed according to the set value. For example, a plurality of conditions for the large winning opening 540 to be in the closed state from the open state are prepared (for example, a plurality of different expected values for the number of gaming balls which can make the large winning opening 540 win a game ball in one round) A condition may be prepared, and by changing the condition according to the set value, the condition with the above expected value may be selected more easily as the set value is higher. As a specific example, it is considered that the opening time of the big winning opening 540 is likely to be longer as the setting value is higher by determining the opening time of the big winning opening 540 in the round game by drawing according to the setting value. Be In addition, by changing the count of gaming balls in which the big winning opening 540 is closed from the open state in the round game according to the setting value, the number of gaming balls to the big winning opening 540 tends to increase as the setting value increases. It is also conceivable to

  Moreover, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is a mode of a normal hit, the normal motorized role 46 changes from the closed state to the open state only for a predetermined period. By changing the time (opening time) in which the character 46 is in the open state in accordance with the set value, the opening time of the normal motorized character 46 may easily increase as the setting value becomes higher.

  Also, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is a big hit that turns on the probability change flag ON as in the special figure 1-2 and the special figure 1-4, after the big hit gaming state ends, the next big hit game is executed The high probability gaming state continues until it is played, but it is not necessarily limited to this, and when the game ball wins at a specific timing (for example, the first start opening 420 and the second start opening 440, the variation display of the special symbol is suspended When the variable display of the special symbol is started), the transition lottery of whether to shift from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state may be executed. In this case, by changing the transition probability from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state according to the setting value, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of continuing the high probability gaming state (from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state It is also possible to lower the transition probability to In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the setting check process (step S72, step S82) is performed when the game ball is won to the first start opening 420 and the second start opening 440, but this setting check When it is determined that the processing is not normal (NO in step S721), the result of the transition lottery is also cleared in the backup clear processing (step S2420) by execution of the setting change processing (step S24) (the probability change flag is also OFF) Set).

[8-1. Extended example]
As described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the set value being set, the big hit probability, the reach probability, the variation time of the special symbol, the selection ratio of the main symbol (the number of rounds, the probability variation rush ratio, the time reduction rush ratio) are changed Although the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above has been described, providing the setting difference is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and part of the configuration may be changed. Hereinafter, another embodiment in which the configuration is partially changed will be described. The configurations not particularly mentioned in the description of the other embodiments below are the same as the configurations of the present embodiment, but in the following, for example, each member such as the main CPU is given a reference numeral except for the step numbers. I did not.

[8-1-1. Expansion example 1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 1 has a high probability until the next big hit gaming state is started after the big hit gaming state is ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit A so-called "probability loop machine" in which the state continues will be described as an example. In this first extended example, an upper limit is provided to the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (hereinafter referred to as "loop number"), and the jackpot gaming state is ended when the loop number reaches this upper limit. The later gaming state is controlled to the low probability gaming state, and the upper limit of the loop number (hereinafter referred to as "limiter number") may be different according to the set value (such a gaming machine is Also known as This will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a table showing an example of the selection rate of the number of times of the limiter in the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 1 for each setting value.

  The main CPU of the pachinko gaming machine according to the expansion example 1 checks the number of loops if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, and the number of limiters checks the number of loops if the number of loops is 0 The lottery means, the loop number counting means for incrementing the loop number when the loop number is within the specified range (in the present example, 1 to 4), and the loop number having the specified value (5 for the limiter upper limit in this example) The game state control means controls the game state after the big hit game state ends to the low probability state, and the loop number reset means resets the loop number if the loop number is a prescribed value. It should be noted that the limiter number lottery may be performed at any timing at the start of the big hit gaming state, during the big hit gaming state, or at the end of the big hit gaming state when it is determined that the result of the big hit determination is a big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 46, in setting 1, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 25%, twice with a probability of 30%, and determined three times with a probability of 25%, It is determined four times with a probability of 15% and five times with a probability of 5%. In setting 2, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 25%, determined twice with a probability of 25%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined 4 times with a probability of 20% And 5 times with 5% probability. In setting 3, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 15%, determined twice with a probability of 25%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined 4 times with a probability of 20% It is determined in five times with a probability of 15%. In setting 4, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 15%, determined twice with a probability of 20%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined 4 times with a probability of 25% It is determined in five times with a probability of 15%. In setting 5, for example, the number of limiters is determined once at a probability of 5%, twice at a probability of 20%, three at a probability of 25%, and four times at a probability of 25% It is determined in 5 times with a probability of 25%. In setting 6, for example, the number of limiters is determined once with a probability of 5%, determined twice with a probability of 10%, determined three times with a probability of 25%, and determined 4 times with a probability of 30% It is determined in 5 times with a probability of 25%. That is, the higher the setting value, the higher the degree of expectation determined to be the larger number of limiters.

  In this way, the expectation for the number of times of limiters is made different according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the more the big hit gaming state and the high probability gaming state can be repeated, so that one chance ( It becomes possible to make the amount of prize balls awarded to the player different according to the setting value at the opportunity to be controlled to the low probability gaming state when winning once. In addition, although the expectation value for the number of limiters is varied according to the set value, it is possible to prevent the player from inferring the set value by the number of limiters since the number of limiters is determined by lottery. It has become.

  In the first expansion example, the number of limiters is determined by lottery according to the installation value, but the lottery is not necessarily essential. For example, although there is a concern that the set value may be estimated by the player, The number of limiters may be uniquely determined according to the set value, such as three times for 1 · 2, 3 times for setting 3 · 4, 4 times for setting 5 · 6, and so on.

  The number of limiters described above may be determined separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or may be determined together for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol. good.

  For example, when the number of limiters described above is determined separately for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the first limiter number for the first special symbol Is determined and controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol during the loop, the number of loops for the first special symbol is incremented. However, when being controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol during the above loop, without incrementing the loop number for the first special symbol, the second limiter number for the second special symbol Decide. In this case, the loop may be ended (controlled to the low probability gaming state) when any one of the first limiter count and the second limiter count reaches the limiter count, or the first limiter count and the second limiter. The loop may be ended when both the number and the limiter number are reached.

  Also, for example, when the number of limiters is determined for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Determines the number of limiters when the jackpot is a big hit, and during the loop, if it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the result of the jackpot determination regardless of whether it is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the loop Increment the number. Then, when the number of loops reaches the number of limiters, the loop is ended.

  Furthermore, although the pachinko machine of extended example 1 mentioned above is a so-called probability changing loop machine, it does not necessarily have to be a probability changing loop machine, and for example, the above technical concept is applied to a so-called "ST machine" pachinko gaming machine You can also The "ST machine" controls the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state to a high probability gaming state by all means or on the basis of a predetermined lottery result, and the high probability gaming state a predetermined number of times (hereinafter referred to as "ST times"). It is a pachinko gaming machine which continues until the variation display of the special symbol called) is performed, and when the variation display of the special symbol of the predetermined number of times is performed, ends the high probability gaming state and controls to the low probability gaming state. Even in such a "ST machine", the degree of expectation for the number of limiters can be varied according to the set value. In other words, the larger the set value, the more the jackpot gaming state and the high probability gaming state can be repeated, so that one chance (the opportunity until it is controlled to the low probability gaming state when winning once in the jackpot) It is possible to make the amount of winning balls awarded to the player different in accordance with the set value.

  In the so-called "ST machine", although it is possible to set "the number of times of ST" to a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times), the number of times of ST may be different according to the set value. . For example, the main CPU of the “ST machine” can determine the number of times of ST by lottery, and the expected value of the number of times of ST determined according to the set value can be made different. As a specific example, the expected value of the number of STs determined by lottery is 60 times in setting 1, 63 times in setting 2, 66 times in setting 3, 69 times in setting 4, 72 times in setting 5, and 6 By setting the number 75, the expected value of the number ST can be increased as the set value is higher. However, it is not essential to determine the number of STs by lottery, and the number of STs may be uniquely determined according to the set value. When the number of times of ST is made to differ according to the set value, it is preferable to make the number of times of time reduction common to all set values. For example, when the expected value of ST number or ST number is 60 in setting 1, 63 in setting 2, 66 in setting 3, 69 in setting 4, 72 in setting 5 and 75 in setting 6 For example, it is conceivable to set the number of time saving to 60, which is common to all settings. Then, the sub CPU performs an effect that can be grasped that the gaming state is a high probability game state until the number of STs reaches a certain number of games (for example, 60 games). For example, when the number of STs reaches a certain number of games It is preferable to perform, for example, a liquid crystal display device to make it difficult to grasp that the game is in the high probability gaming state, regardless of whether or not the high probability gaming state is being played. As a result, it is possible to make the number of times of ST and the expected value of the number of times of ST different depending on the set value while preventing the player from detecting the set value.

  Further, also in the pachinko gaming machine of extended example 1, setting check processing (step S72, step S82) is performed, for example, at the time of winning of the game ball to the first start port and the second start port. When it is determined that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), even in the loop (that is, even when the big hit gaming state and the high probability gaming state are repeatedly executed), The number of loops does not reach the number of limiters, and the number of loops is also cleared in the backup clear processing (step S2420) by executing the setting change processing (step S24) (the probability change flag is also set to OFF).

[8-1-2. Expansion example 2-1]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 2 has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. For example, the specific area is sectioned with the flowing area of the gaming ball by the item, and it is usually considered difficult (or impossible) to enter the gaming ball into the specific area. Moreover, as a result of the big hit judgment of a special symbol, a small hit is prepared besides the big hit.

  Specifically, the main CPU performs the big hit determination of the special symbol with the big hit probability determined according to the set value, and performs the small hit determination of the small hit when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. And, when the result of the hit determination of the small hit is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, although the above-mentioned big hit is a hit involving operation of the condition device, the above-mentioned small hit is not a hit involving operation of the condition device.

  Further, in the second extended example, for example, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time-short game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening; Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in the definite variation time short game state such as the short time gaming state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit determination of the small hit.

  In addition, the main CPU operates the predetermined movable piece to close the specific area when the result of the big hit judgment about the special symbol made based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball to the starting opening is a small hit. A small hit game execution means that executes a small hit game to an open mode and a game ball on the specific area that has become an open mode by the small hit game execution, via the payout / launch control circuit And a payout means for paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of game balls as a winning ball.

  Further, in the second expansion example, the number of time saving is set to, for example, 5 times, and a specific port is provided in the specific area. Then, for example, when the game ball is hit as a normal hit in the five short time game state and the game ball wins in the starting opening, when the small hit occurs, the predetermined movable piece is activated and the specific area is opened. At this time, when it is detected that the gaming ball having entered the specific area has further entered the specific port, the main CPU executes a big hit game. In addition, when it does not reach a normal hit in the five time saving game state, the main CPU ends the time saving game state, and controls the non-time saving game state. In the time saving game state, the game is performed by hitting the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, and in the non-time saving game state, the game ball is fired to the left area in the game area A game is played.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 2, for example, a time saving game state in which the second special symbol game is mainly played by changing the small hitting probability in at least the second special symbol game according to the set value. In this case, it is possible to make the opening frequency of the specific area, and hence the dispensing amount, different according to the set value.

  For example, the probability of a small hit is 1/9 in setting 1, 1/8 in setting 2, 1/7 in setting 3, 1/6 in setting 4, 1/5 in setting 5, and 6 And a quarter. In this case, as long as the variation time of the normal symbol is longer as the setting is higher or the opening mode of the ordinary electric character is not a mode in which the gaming ball is less likely to win the starting opening as the setting is higher, the higher setting value is It becomes easy to win the game ball in the starting opening. As a result, the higher the setting value, the higher the winning frequency of the gaming ball in the specific area, and, consequently, it becomes possible to provide a difference in the ball withdrawal speed according to the setting value.

  In the second expansion, the probability change flag may be set to ON in the time saving game state, but the probability change flag does not have to be set to ON.

  In addition, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is executed also in this case. . If the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned OFF, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU executes a small hit game based on the above small hit. Without the game, the game permission flag is set to OFF, and the abnormal process is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process including that the result of the big hit determination about the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit.

[8-1-3. Expansion example 2-2]
The pachinko gaming machine of extended example 2-2 is provided with the first starting opening and the second starting opening. The main CPU makes a big hit determination of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") based on the winning of the game ball to the first start opening, and the game ball to the second start opening Based on the jackpot determination of the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is performed.

  In addition, the main CPU is a first gaming state (for example, a probability change flag) in which a first special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "first special lottery") is mainly performed among the first special lottery and the second special lottery. The second game state (for example, the probability change flag is ON) in which the normal gaming state in which both the time saving flag is set to OFF and the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "second special lottery") is mainly performed And a game state control means capable of controlling any of a plurality of game states including an advantageous game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF. In this pachinko gaming machine, when a big hit is won with a specific symbol in the first gaming state, after the big hit game is over, the second gaming state is controlled.

  In addition, a common drawing gate is provided in the right side area of the game area, and when the game ball passes through the normal gate, a normal lottery is performed. If the result of the normal lottery is a specific result (for example, a normal hit), the main CPU opens a predetermined movable member (for example, an electric tulip), thereby facilitating the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening Be done. Therefore, when playing a game by firing the game ball toward the right side area of the game area, the second starting opening is compared to the case where the game ball is fired toward the left side area of the game area and played The winning frequency of the game ball is increased.

  The main CPU makes a big hit determination of the first special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to the set value in the first special lottery, and when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, a predetermined big winning opening multiple rounds It has a first jackpot execution means for executing a jackpot game which is opened over a number.

  In the second special lottery, the main CPU performs the big hit determination of the second special symbol with a big hit probability determined according to the set value, and when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, a predetermined big winning opening is A second jackpot execution means is provided which executes a jackpot game opened over a plurality of rounds. In the second special lottery, when the result of the big hit determination of the second special symbol is a loss in the second special lottery, the main CPU performs a hit determination of the small hit, and when the result of the hit determination of the small hit is the small hit The game also includes small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game.

  The jackpot probability in the first special lottery and the jackpot probability in the second special lottery are common. The jackpot probability in the first gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF is, for example, 1/300 in setting 1, 1/290 in setting 2, 1/280 in setting 3, 1/270 in setting 4 The setting 5 is 1/260, and the setting 6 is 1/250. In addition, the jackpot probability in the second gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON is, for example, 1/30 in setting 1, 1/29 in setting 2, 1/28 in setting 3, 27 minutes in setting 4 It is 1/26 in setting 5 and 1/25 in setting 6.

  When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the main CPU executes the first big hit game execution means for executing a big hit game in which a predetermined big winning opening is opened over multiple rounds, and the result of the second special lottery When it is a big hit, it has the 2nd big hit game execution expedient which executes the big hit game where specified big winning a prize mouth is opened over the number of rounds. The big winning opening opened when the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, and the big winning opening opened when the result of the second special drawing is a big hitting are both common winning openings. It may be good or different big winning opening.

  Further, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is 0 (common to the settings 1 to 6) regardless of whether the probability change flag is ON or OFF. Also, the small hit probability in the second special lottery, for example, 1/9 in setting 1, 1/8 in setting 2, 1/7 in setting 3, even if the probability change flag is either ON or OFF The setting 4 is 1/6, and the setting 5 is 1/6. As described above, although the small hitting probability in the second special lottery varies depending on the set value being set, the small hitting probability in any of the set values is higher than the small hitting probability in the first special lottery.

  In addition, the main CPU has a small hit game execution means for executing a small hit game when the result of the second special lottery is a small hit. The small hit game is a game in which the same large winning opening as the large winning opening opened when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit is opened. When the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening, the payout / firing control circuit operates the payout device to control a predetermined number of gaming balls to be paid out as a prize. However, in the small hit game, since the number of game balls that can be made to win in the big winning opening is smaller than the big hit game, the degree of advantage for the player is smaller in the small hit game than in the big hit game.

  Also, as described above, the small hit probability in the first special lottery is zero. That is, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU performs a small hit determination in which the small hit probability is zero. However, instead of this, when the result of the big hit determination of the first special symbol is a loss, the main CPU may not perform the small hit determination itself.

  Although the above-mentioned big hit is a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device, the above-mentioned small hit is not a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device.

  In addition, the main CPU is based on the first special symbol variation display control means for performing variable display of the first special symbol based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening, and based on the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening And a second special symbol variation display control means for performing variation display of the second special symbol. The first special symbol variation display control means causes the first special symbol to stop so that the result of the first special lottery is displayed after the first special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time. The second special symbol variation display control means causes the second special symbol to stop so that the result of the second special lottery is displayed after the second special symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time.

  The variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol variation display control means and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol variation display control means can be performed at the same timing. That is, when the game ball is won in the second starting port while the variable display of the first special symbol is being performed based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting port, the first special symbol is in the changing display. Even then, the variable display of the second special symbol is started. If the game ball wins the first starting hole while the variation display of the second special symbol is being performed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening, even if the second special symbol is changing display The variable display of the first special symbol is started.

  In addition, the average time of the variation time of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol variation display control means is almost the same in the case where the probability change flag is ON and OFF, but the second special symbol The average time of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol executed by the fluctuation display control means is significantly different between the case where the probability change flag is ON and the case where it is OFF. For example, the average time of variation time of the first special symbol is 10 sec in the first gaming state and 10 seconds in the second gaming state, while the average time of variation time of the second special symbol is 1000 sec in the first gaming state, The second gaming state is 1 sec. Special lottery (the first special lottery, the second special lottery) is performed when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is started, but the result of the special lottery is displayed Is when the variation display of the special symbol is stopped. Therefore, although the second special lottery has already been performed when the game ball has won in the second starting opening in the first gaming state, it takes a considerable amount of time before the result of the second special lottery is displayed. It becomes.

  As described above, in the first gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to OFF, the second special symbol is obtained even if the game ball is shot toward the right side area of the game area, for example, and the game ball is won in the second starting opening. It takes time until the fluctuation display of is stopped. Moreover, since the second special symbol is variably displayed in any of a plurality of patterns having different fluctuation times, the second special symbol temporarily stops in a mode showing a small hit (it is a small hit Even if the special winning opening is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 1.8 seconds), it is difficult to grasp the timing at which it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit. Therefore, it is also difficult to perform what is called aiming, in which the game ball is made to win in the big winning opening aiming at timing when it is determined that the second special symbol is a small hit. Furthermore, in the first gaming state, when the gaming ball is fired toward, for example, the right side area of the gaming area, a warning sound is output from the speaker under the control of the sub CPU, for example. Therefore, in the first gaming state, a game is performed by firing the gaming ball toward, for example, the left side area of the gaming area. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, by passing the gaming ball through the regular drawing gate, not only the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening is facilitated but also the variation time of the second special symbol. In order to win a small hit as short as 1 sec and at any probability in the second special lottery with a probability higher than 1/10 regardless of the setting value, a game where the game ball is fired toward the right side area of the game area, for example To be done.

  The average time (for example, 1000 sec) of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the first gaming state is, for example, 50 times or more of the average time (for example, 10 sec) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the first gaming state Is preferable, but at least 10 times or more is preferable.

  The sub CPU controls the decorative symbol variation display control means to control the variation display of the decorative symbol to be displayed, for example, on the liquid crystal display device in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Equipped with However, in the first gaming state, this decorative symbol variation display control means does not stand out the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol even if the gaming ball is won in the second starting opening, (1) When the game ball wins in the starting opening, the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a conspicuous manner.

  If the example of the above-mentioned "appearing aspect" is explained in full detail, the liquid crystal display device is, for example, at the approximate center of the display area, the left symbol (first symbol), the middle symbol (second symbol) and the right symbol (third symbol) Can be displayed and the result of the special lottery can be displayed. In addition, in a small area at one corner of the four corners of the display area, for example, a fourth symbol (for example, や or の) that can be variably displayed (for example, blinked) in synchronization with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Can be displayed. The ratio in which the first to third symbols occupy the display area is extremely large compared to the ratio in which the fourth symbol occupies the display area, so the player's gaze is in the first to third symbols rather than the fourth symbol. It will turn. Then, for example, in the first gaming state, when the gaming ball is won in the second starting opening, the sub CPU performs the fluctuation display of only the fourth symbol without changing the display of the first to third symbols, while the sub CPU (1) When the game ball is won in the starting opening, the first to third symbols are variably displayed and the fourth symbol is also variably displayed. In this manner, in the first gaming state, even if the game ball is won in the second starting opening, the variation display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the second special symbol is not performed in a conspicuous manner, and the game ball is displayed in the first starting opening It can be realized that the variable display of the decorative symbol synchronized with the first special symbol is performed in a prominent manner when the player wins a prize.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the expansion example 2-2 described above, in the first gaming state, the result of the second special lottery is hardly displayed even if the gaming ball is won in the second starting port, but the second gaming state In addition to facilitating the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening, the average time of fluctuation time of the second special symbol is as short as 1 sec. Moreover, in the second gaming state, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening, the probability that the result of the second special lottery will be a small hit (9/1/4 according to the setting) is a big hit Because it is higher than the probability of becoming (1/30 depending on the setting 1/25 depending on the setting) opening of the big winning opening by small hitting game is performed with high frequency, without setting the time saving flag (ie normal lottery Without increasing the frequency of execution of the game), it is possible to increase the opportunity for the game ball as a prize to be paid out. Moreover, since the probability that the result of the second special lottery is a small hit varies depending on the setting that has been set, even if the big hit game is not being executed, the balls are ejected according to the set value that has been set Can be made different.

  In addition, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variable display of the special symbol is performed by the main CPU, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 is executed also in this case. . Therefore, the main CPU performs the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 even when, for example, in the second gaming state, the gaming ball is won in the first starting opening during the variable display of the second special symbol. When the main CPU determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the main CPU turns off the game permission flag and executes the process for abnormal time. That is, in the second gaming state, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol in the variable display is small hit, even if it is determined in the setting check process that the normal is not normal, the main CPU Without executing the small hit game based on the hit, the game permission flag is turned OFF, and the abnormal time process is executed. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the second special symbol in the variable display in the second gaming state is a small hit, including the information that it is the second gaming state and the information that it is a small hit The game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process.

[8-1-4. Expansion example 3]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 3 is a pachinko gaming machine having two routes for being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and therefore has a specific area in which a specific port is provided. For example, the specific area is sectioned with the flowing area of the gaming ball by the item, and it is usually considered difficult (or impossible) to enter the gaming ball into the specific area. Moreover, as a result of the big hit judgment of a special symbol, a small hit is prepared besides the big hit.

  Specifically, the main CPU performs the big hit determination of the special symbol with the big hit probability determined according to the set value, and performs the small hit determination of the small hit when the result of the big hit determination is a loss. And, when the result of the hit determination of the small hit is a small hit, the small hit game is executed. That is, although the above-mentioned big hit is a hit involving operation of the condition device, the above-mentioned small hit is not a hit involving operation of the condition device.

  Further, in the third extended example, for example, in the normal gaming state such as the non-time-short game state in which the time saving flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening; Of the second special symbol game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the first special symbol game is mainly played. On the other hand, in the definite variation time short game state such as the short time gaming state in which the time saving flag is set to ON, the second special symbol game is mainly played among the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game. Further, in the second special symbol game, when the result of the big hit determination is a loss, a small hit is won with a predetermined probability. In addition, when the result of the big hit determination in the first special symbol game is a loss, it is not necessary to perform the small hit determination of the small hit.

  In addition, the main CPU operates the predetermined movable piece when the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol made based on the entry (acceptance) of the game ball to the starting opening is a small hit, and the inside of the specific area The small hit game execution means which performs the small hit game which permits the approach of the game ball to is provided. In this manner, when the predetermined movable piece is activated, the gaming ball enters the inside of the specific area, and when the gaming ball entering the inside of the specific area is detected as entering (accepting) the specific opening, the main The CPU controls the jackpot gaming state. That is, when the result of the big hit determination processing performed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening is the big hit, the main CPU is the first big hit game in which round games for opening the big winning opening are played over multiple rounds. Based on the first big hit game control means to control the state and the fact that the game ball has entered the specific port when the small hit game is executed, the round game to operate the predetermined movable piece over multiple rounds And a second big hit game control means for controlling a second big hit game state to be performed.

  In such a pachinko gaming machine, in this extended example 3, the ease of winning of the game ball to the starting opening (for example, the execution frequency of the small hitting game and the opening pattern of the ordinary electric role) is set value It is different according to. Also in the third extended example, the main CPU determines that the result of the normal symbol determination performed based on the detection of the passage to the gate through which the game ball can pass when the player performs a right strike is a normal hit. Sometimes, the motorized control is controlled from the closed state to the open state. When the ordinary electric role becomes open, winning of the game ball to the starting opening is facilitated. As a method of making the execution frequency of small hit games different according to the set value, for example, if the probability of the normal hit in the normal symbol determination is changed according to the set value, or if the variation time of the normal symbol is different according to the set value It can be realized by

  As a method of changing the ease of winning of the game ball to the starting opening according to the setting value, a method of changing the probability of the normal hitting in the normal symbol determination according to the setting value will be described as an example.

  For example, the probability of a normal hit is 1/60 in setting 1, 1/50 in setting 2, 1/40 in setting 3, 1/30 in setting 4, 1/20 in setting 5, and 6 And one tenth. In this case, as long as the variation time of the normal symbol is longer as the setting is higher or the opening mode of the ordinary electric character is not a mode in which the gaming ball is less likely to win the starting opening as the setting is higher, the higher setting value is It becomes easy to win the game ball in the starting opening. As a result, the higher the setting value, the higher the execution frequency of the small hit game, and thus, the opportunity to be controlled to the big hit game state by the second big hit game control means is promoted. In this way, it is possible to provide a difference in the ball withdrawal speed according to the set value.

  In addition, also in this expansion example 3, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening or the second starting opening while the variation display of the special symbol is being performed by the in CPU 101, the setting check process of step S72 or step S82 To be executed. If the main CPU 101 determines that the setting check process is not normal (NO in step S721), the game permission flag is turned OFF, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, Execute abnormal processing. Therefore, even if the result of the big hit determination for the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit, when it is determined that the setting check process is not normal, the main CPU 101 executes a small hit game based on the above small hit. Without the game, the game permission flag is set to OFF, and the abnormal process is executed. Therefore, the game permission flag is not set to ON unless various data are cleared in the backup clear process including that the result of the big hit determination about the special symbol in the variable display is a small hit.

[8-1-5. Expansion example 4]
In the pachinko gaming machine of Extended Example 4, even if the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, it is not immediately controlled to the big hit gaming state with that alone, but the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit The conditional device operates on the basis of the above, and the bonus continuous operating device operates on the basis that the gaming ball passes (or enters) the predetermined area on the premise that the conditional device operates. This will be described below with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a view showing an example of an aspect in which the game ball passes the right-hand product operation right gate, and FIG. 48 is a view showing an example of a mode in which the game ball passes the left-hand product operation gate.

  As shown in FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, the pachinko gaming machine of this extended example 4 is provided with a continuously operated left gate 1100 and a continuously operated right gate 1110 in the game area. In addition, the sorting apparatus 1120 capable of distributing the game balls flowing down the game area to any one of the product continuous operation left gate 1100 and the product continuous operation right gate 1110 is the product continuous operation gate 1100. It is disposed above 1110.

  The character continuously operating left gate 1100 and the character continuously operating right gate 1110 are respectively provided with a left gate sensor and a right gate sensor (both not shown) capable of detecting passage of gaming balls. The left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are normally disabled to detect passage of gaming balls, and are enabled based on the activation of the condition device. In addition, after the left gate sensor and the right gate sensor are activated based on the activation of the condition device, the game ball operates one of the character continuous operation left gate 1100 and the character continuous operation right gate 1110. It is invalidated based on the detection of passing.

  When the left gate sensor detects the passage of the gaming ball to the feature continuous operation left gate 1100, the main CPU controls the 8R big hit gaming state in which, for example, eight rounds of round games are executed. In addition, when the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the feature continuous operation right gate 1110, the main CPU causes 2 rounds of 2 rounds to be executed. In the 16R big hit gaming state (selection rate 50%) where the round game is executed, it is decided by the lottery which one is executed, it controls to the big hit gaming state which is decided with the particular lottery.

  In addition, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the service continuous operation left gate 1100 and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the service continuous operation right gate 1110, the big hit The expected value of the amount of winning balls to be paid out in the gaming state is the same.

  In addition, the game ball which has passed through the product continuous operation left gate 1100 or the character continuous operation right gate 1110 flows down the game area as it is, but instead, it is discharged from the out port to the outside of the pachinko game machine It may be configured as follows.

  The distributing device 1120 distributes the gaming ball which has reached the upper side of the distributing device 1120 to any one of the character continuous operating left gate 1100 and the character continuous operating right gate 1110 by regular operation. In the first position where the sorting device 1120 is inclined to the left, it is easy for the game ball to pass through the feature continuous operation right gate 1110 (see FIG. 47), and in the second position where the sorting device 1120 is inclined to the right, the game ball plays a role It is easy to pass the object continuous operation left gate 1100 (see FIG. 48).

  In this fourth expanded example, the ease of passage of the game ball is made different between the bonus item continuous operation left gate 1100 and the bonus item continuous operation right gate 1110 according to the set value. For example, in the setting 1, the operation of the sorting apparatus 1120 repeats the first attitude 0.5 seconds and the second attitude 1.5 seconds, and in the setting 2, the first attitude 0.7 seconds and the second attitude 1.3 The action of repeating seconds and the action of repeating the first attitude 0.9 seconds and the second attitude 1.1 seconds in setting 3 repeat the first attitude 1.1 seconds and the second attitude 0.9 seconds in setting 4 In operation 5, the operation to repeat the first attitude 1.3 seconds and the second attitude 0.7 seconds in setting 5; in setting 6 the operation to repeat the first attitude 1.5 seconds and the second attitude 0.5 seconds Then, according to the set value, it is possible to change the mode of the jackpot gaming state.

  In this extended example 4, when the left gate sensor detects passage of the gaming ball to the accessory continuous operation left gate 1100, and the right gate sensor detects passage of the gaming ball to the accessory continuous operation right gate 1110. The expected value of the amount of prize balls to be paid out in the big hit gaming state is the same as when it was played. That is, although it is possible to change the mode of the big hit gaming state according to the set value, there is no difference in the amount of award balls paid out in the big hit gaming state according to the set value, but it is not limited thereto. The jackpot is paid out in the big hit gaming state when the passage of the game ball to the service continuous operation left gate 1100 is detected and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the service continuous operation right gate 1110 The expected value of the winning amount may be made different. For example, when the left gate sensor detects the passage of gaming balls to the feature continuous operation left gate 1100, either the 2R big hit gaming state (selection rate 70%) or the 16R big hit gaming state (selection rate 30%) If it is decided by the lottery performed at the above selection rate, and the right gate sensor detects the passage of the game ball to the feature continuous operation right gate 1110, the 2R big hit gaming state (selection rate 30%) It is also possible to determine which of the 16R and the 16R big hit gaming state (selection rate 70%) is to be executed by the lottery performed at the above selection rate. In this case, the amount of award balls to be paid out in the big hit gaming state can be differentiated according to the set value, and the higher the set value, the greater the expected value of the game balls to be paid out as prize balls controlled to a high hit jackpot state It is possible to increase the possibility of

  Further, in the fourth expanded example, when the gaming ball passes either of the two gates (the character continuous operation right gate 1100 and the character continuous operation right gate 1110) under the condition where the condition device is operated, the character continuous operation is performed. The device is configured to operate and be controlled to a big hit gaming state. However, even if the condition device is activated based on the result of the big hit judgment of the special symbol made based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening, the game ball operates any of the above two gates. The game ball may win a prize at the starting opening before passing. In this case, the main CPU 101 performs a setting check process (for example, based on winning of the gaming ball to the starting opening) under the situation where the gaming ball has not yet passed through either of the above two gates although the condition device has operated. Step S72 in FIG. 30 may be executed, and it may be determined that the setting check process is not normal (for example, NO in step S721 in FIG. 31). In this case, even if the condition device is activated, the main CPU 101 turns off the game permission flag (step S722 described later), and it becomes impossible to advance the game.

  Further, in the fourth expanded example, two gates (a character continuous operation device operates the character continuous operation device below the distribution device 1120 on the premise that the condition device is operating and the passage of the game ball is detected. Although the right gate 1100 and the prize continuous actuation right gate 1110) are provided, the provision below the sorting apparatus 1120 is not necessarily limited to the prize continuous actuation gate, for example, a starting opening and a general winning opening Also good. That is, in this case, the sorting device 1120 regularly starts the game ball that has reached the upper side of the sorting device 1120 in a regular operation, a starting opening serving as a big hit determination trigger of a special symbol, and a general winning combination that does not become the big hit determination trigger. It distributes to either of the mouth and. The operation of the sorting apparatus 1120 is, for example, an operation of repeating the first attitude 0.5 seconds and the second attitude 1.5 seconds in setting 1; in setting 2, the first attitude 0.7 seconds and the second attitude 1 .3 seconds, setting 3 to repeat the first attitude 0.9 seconds and second attitude 1.1 seconds, setting 4 to set the first attitude 1.1 seconds and the second attitude 0.9 seconds In setting 5, the operation repeats the first attitude 1.3 seconds and the second attitude 0.7 seconds, and in the setting 6, the operation repeats the first attitude 1.5 seconds and the second attitude 0.5 seconds By doing this, it is possible to make the winning rate for the starting opening different according to the set value. Moreover, according to such a pachinko gaming machine, although it is possible to make the winning percentage to the starting opening different according to the set value, the game ball launch timing by the player regardless of any set value. It is possible to make it interesting that you can aim for a winning opening.

[8-1-6. Expansion example 5]
The pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5 does not make the data concerning the basic specification of the pachinko gaming machine different according to the setting value, but allows the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine to be changed according to the setting value. . Note that, in this extended example 5, the setting value is configured to be set to any one of the five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, but it is not necessary to be five stages, and it may be plural stages. Can be determined arbitrarily.

  Specifically, when the set value is set to setting 1, the main CPU performs, for example, a 1/99 probability special symbol big hit determination, and if the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, for example, 5 rounds Control the jackpot gaming state. That is, when the set value is set to setting 1, instead of the jackpot probability being relatively high at less than one-hundredth, it is called so-called sweet digit, where the amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot gaming state is relatively small It is possible to execute a game with game characteristics.

  Also, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and for example, 12 rounds (for example, balls out) when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot Control to about 1,500 pieces of jackpot gaming state. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the game is performed with a game characteristic called general digipachi, such as a jackpot probability of 1/300, and an amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot gaming state of about 1,500. It is possible to In this gaming machine, the main CPU controls the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state to the high probability gaming state, and the high probability gaming state ends and the low probability gaming state is reached when a predetermined period has passed. Control. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 2, it is possible to execute a game with so-called ST machine gaming characteristics.

  Also, when the setting value is set to setting 3, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and for example, 12 rounds (for example, balls out) when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot Control to about 1,500 pieces of jackpot gaming state. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the game is performed with a game characteristic called general digipachi, such as a jackpot probability of 1/300, and an amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot gaming state of about 1,500. It is possible to And in this gaming machine, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU determines, for example, whether or not to set the probability change flag ON using the symbol random number, and when the probability change flag is set to ON, the big hit game The gaming state after the state is over is controlled to the high probability gaming state until the next big hit gaming state is executed. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 3, it is possible to execute a game with so-called odd change loop game characteristics.

  Also, when the setting value is set to setting 4, the main CPU performs a big hit determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and for example, 12 rounds (for example, out balls) when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. Control to about 1,500 pieces of jackpot gaming state. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the game is performed with a game characteristic called general digipachi, such as a jackpot probability of 1/300, and an amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot gaming state of about 1,500. It is possible to And in this gaming machine, when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, the main CPU determines, for example, whether or not to set the probability change flag ON using the symbol random number, and when the probability change flag is set to ON, the big hit game The gaming state after the state is over is controlled to the high probability gaming state until the next big hit gaming state is executed. However, an upper limit is provided for the number of times the jackpot gaming state and the high probability gaming state are repeatedly executed (the above-described “loop number”), and when the loop number reaches this upper limit, the main CPU ends the big hit gaming state Control the gaming state of the game to a low probability gaming state. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 4, it is possible to execute a game with a so-called limiter game. In the above game characteristics, if the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the high probability gaming state, the high probability gaming state is continued until the next big hit gaming state is executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the high probability gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends may be a so-called ST machine which is ended when a predetermined time period elapses and is controlled to the low probability gaming state.

  Also, when the setting value is set to setting 5, the main CPU performs a jackpot determination of a probability special symbol of, for example, 1/300, and for example, 12 rounds (for example, balls out) when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot Control to about 1,500 pieces of jackpot gaming state. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 2, the game is performed with a game characteristic called general digipachi, such as a jackpot probability of 1/300, and an amount of prize balls paid out in one jackpot gaming state of about 1,500. It is possible to In this gaming machine, when the big hit gaming state ends, the main CPU turns on the definite change flag ON always or with a certain probability, and when the positive change flag is set on, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends , Control to high probability gaming state. Further, the main CPU performs a gaming state transition lottery when making a big hit determination of a special symbol in the high probability gaming state, and sets the probability change flag to OFF when deciding to transition the gaming state in the gaming state transition lottery. Execute control to shift from the high probability gaming state to the low probability gaming state. That is, when the setting value is set to setting 5, it is possible to execute the game in the game nature in which the transition lottery to the low probability gaming state is performed in the high probability gaming state.

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine of the extended example 5, according to the setting value, for example, the pachinko gaming machine's game characteristics can be changed instead of the specs such as the big hit probability, and pachinko with a variety of gaming characteristics. It becomes possible to execute the game with one machine.

  In the above, in setting 1 it is possible to execute a game with so-called sweet digital game characteristics, in setting 2 it is possible to carry out a game with so-called ST machine gaming characteristics, and in setting 3 it is so-called It is possible to execute the game in the game nature called a probability change loop machine, in setting 4 it is possible to execute the game in the game nature called so-called limiter machine, in setting 5 low in the high probability gaming state Although it is possible to execute the game in the game nature in which the transition lottery to the probability game state is performed, it is not essential to be able to execute all the game nature in accordance with the setting value. However, it is preferable to be able to switch and execute the so-called ST machine game and the so-called odd loop game according to the set value. Although the game nature called the so-called ST machine and the game nature called the so-called probability change loop machine are both common in that they may be controlled to the high probability gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the high probability gaming state is It differs greatly depending on whether it continues until the next big hit game state or it ends halfway. In this way, by making it possible to switch between and execute two substantially different game features that are similar but seemingly different, the way in which the pachinko gaming machine is used by the person responsible for managing the gaming machine, etc. It is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the interest while being entertained.

[8-1-7. Other extended examples]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can play a game using a game medium, and the present invention can be applied to all types of gaming machines in which benefits are provided based on the result of the game. That is, the game is played by the game medium being fired or inserted by the action of a physical player, and the main control circuit 100 itself is not only the form in which the game medium is paid out based on the result of the game. The game medium held by the player may be electromagnetically managed, and a game played by circulating the enclosed game balls or a game played without medals may be enabled. Further, the game medium management device which is attached to (connected to) the main control circuit 100 and manages game media may be used to electromagnetically manage game media held by the player.

  When managed by the gaming media management device connected to the main control circuit 100, the gaming media management device is a device having a ROM and RWM (or RAM) and provided in the gaming machine, which is an external gaming machine (not shown). It is connected to a two-way communication function through a medium handling device and a predetermined interface, and provides a gaming medium lending operation (that is, providing a necessary gaming medium for the player to perform a game medium insertion operation) Operation) or a payout operation of gaming media (ie, the player is required to pay out gaming media on a line, and acquire necessary gaming media on the line) when winning (combination of the above winnings) is achieved for a winning combination Operation), or an operation of electromagnetically recording a game medium to be provided for a game may be performed. In addition, the gaming media management device displays not only the management of the actual number of gaming media but also, for example, the number of gaming media held on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on the management result of the number of gaming media. A game medium number display device (not shown) may be provided, and the number of game media displayed on the owned game medium number display device may be managed. That is, the gaming media management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of gaming media that the player can use for gaming by an electromagnetic method.

  Also, in this case, the gaming media management device has the capability of allowing the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of gaming media recorded to the external gaming media handling device, and also playing a game. In addition to the case where the player directly operates, it has the ability not to reduce the number of recorded game media, and an external connection terminal board (not shown) is provided between it and an external game medium handling device. In such a case, it is desirable that the player can not transmit a signal indicating the number of game media recorded unless the external connection terminal board is used.

  In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operation means operable by the player, a return (settlement) operation means, and an external connection terminal board, and the gaming medium handling device is a slot for inserting valuable values such as bills, a recording medium (For example, an IC card) insertion slot, a non-contact communication antenna for receiving electronic money etc. from a portable terminal, etc., other operation means such as lending operation means, return operation means, game medium handling device side external connection terminal board It may be provided (all not shown).

  As the flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits a valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any one of the lending operation means described above. The game media corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game media handling device to the game media management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and when the game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. Thereafter, a predetermined number of game media are obtained as a result of the game, and the game media management device transmits the number of game media from the game media management device to the game media handling device by operating any return operation means when ending the game. The medium handling device ejects a recording medium recording the number of game media. The gaming media management device clears the number of gaming media stored by itself when transmitting the number of gaming media. The player brings the ejected recording medium to a prize counter or the like to exchange prizes, or moves the game platform to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another platform.

  In the above example, all game media are sent to the game media handling apparatus, but the game machine or game media handling apparatus sends only the number of game media desired by the player and the game media possessed by the player It may be divided and processed. In addition to discharging the recording medium, cash or cash equivalents may be discharged, or may be stored in a portable terminal or the like. Further, the gaming medium handling device may insert a member recording medium of the game arcade, and store the member recording medium in the member recording medium so as to be able to play again later.

  Further, in the gaming machine or game medium handling apparatus, it is possible to execute a lock operation for locking the data communication of the game medium or the valuable value to the game medium handling apparatus or the game medium management apparatus by operating predetermined operation means not shown. It is also good. At that time, the player may be recorded by setting information which can be known only to the player such as a one-time password or by an imaging means provided in the game medium handling apparatus.

  Also, although the above describes the case where the gaming media management device is applied to a pachinko gaming machine, the gaming media management device is similarly applied to pachislot machines, slot machines using gaming balls, and enclosed game machines as well. It is also possible to provide a game medium for the player to be managed.

  As described above, by providing the above-described gaming medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of parts inside the gaming machine compared to when the gaming medium is physically provided for gaming, and the cost and manufacturing cost of the gaming machine As well as being able to reduce the number of players, it is also possible to prevent the player from coming into direct contact with the game media, the gaming environment is improved, noise can be reduced, and the power consumption of the gaming machine is reduced by reducing parts. It will also be. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the insertion slot and the payout opening of the game media and the game media. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

  In addition, an enclosed type gaming machine configured to be playable without gaming media being discharged to the outside, and data relating to increase and decrease of gaming media accompanying consumption, lending and payout of gaming media to the gaming machine, and communication cable When the present invention is applied to a gaming system having a gaming medium management device connected via an optical signal to enable transmission and reception, the gaming system may be configured as follows.

  The outline of the enclosed game machine will be described below. In the enclosed type game machine, the launcher is located above the game area and shoots a game ball as a game medium from above the game area. When the player operates the handle, the payout control circuit causes the ball feed solenoid to be driven, and the ball feed rod pushes the waiting game ball toward the launch pad. Thereby, the game ball moves to the launch pad. In addition, a subtractive sensor is provided on the path from the standby position to the launch pad to detect gaming balls moving to the launch pad. When the gaming ball is detected by the subtraction sensor, the number of holding balls is decremented by one. As described above, since the game ball as the game medium is fired from above the game area, a so-called return ball (fall ball) can be avoided in the enclosed game machine. Then, the game balls discharged from the game area after rolling the game area are polished by the ball polishing apparatus. The game balls polished by the ball-shine device are transported upward by the transport device and guided to the launch device. The game balls are not discharged to the outside of the enclosed game machine, and a predetermined number (for example, 50) of game balls circulate in a series of paths in the game machine.

  In the enclosed type game machine, since the game balls are not discharged to the outside of the game machine, the upper plate and the lower plate for temporarily holding the game balls are not provided. In the enclosed type game machine, since the game ball is not discharged to the outside, the game ball is not actually present at the hand of the player, and the game ball does not actually increase or decrease by playing a game. In the enclosed type game machine, the player starts holding a game after obtaining a ball by lending from the game medium management device. Here, to obtain a holding ball means that the player obtains a game medium in data management. Then, the ball is consumed by the game ball being fired from the launcher, and the number of balls decreases. In addition, as the game balls pass through the respective winning openings and the like provided in the gaming area, the payout is performed by the number according to the conditions set according to the winning openings, and the number of balls increases. Furthermore, the number of balls held is also increased by lending from the gaming media management device. Note that "consumption, lending and payout of game media" indicates that balls are consumed, borrowed and dispensed. Also, "increase or decrease in game media" indicates that the number of balls increases or decreases due to consumption, lending, and payout. Further, "data relating to the increase or decrease of game media accompanying consumption, lending and payout of game media" is data relating to a decrease in balls due to the game ball being fired and an increase in balls due to lending and payout.

  An enclosed type game machine has a payout control circuit and a liquid crystal display device which is a touch panel type. The payout control circuit is connected to various sensors that detect the passage of the game balls such as each winning opening. The payout control circuit manages the number of balls held. For example, when the game ball passes each winning opening, the number of game balls paid out due to that is added to the number of balls held. In addition, when the game ball is fired, the number of balls is subtracted. The payout control circuit transmits data on the number of balls held to the gaming media management device according to the operation of the player. The liquid crystal display device described above is located at the top of the gaming machine, and receives requests for conversion from game value to balls held by a game medium management device (ball lending) and counting (returning) of balls. Then, these requests are transmitted to the payout control circuit via the gaming media management device, and the payout control circuit instructs the gaming media management device to transmit data on the current number of balls held. Here, “game value” refers to money, bills, prepaid media, tokens, electronic money, tickets, etc., and can be converted into balls by the game media management device. In the present embodiment, the gaming media management device is a so-called CR unit, and is configured to be able to receive bills, prepaid media, and the like. In addition, the balls possessed by counting can be used for prize exchange or the like in a game arcade or the like in which a gaming system is installed.

  In addition, the enclosed game machine has a backup power supply. As a result, even when the power is turned off at night or the like, data immediately before turning off can be held. In addition, with this backup power supply, for example, detection of the door frame opening by the door opening sensor may be continuously performed. In this way, it is also possible to prevent fraudulent acts at night. In this case, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be stored. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, information such as the number of times the door frame is opened may be output to a liquid crystal display device or the like of the gaming machine.

  The gaming medium management device has a gaming machine connection board. The gaming medium management device is configured to transmit and receive data (transmission signal) with the gaming machine via the gaming machine connection board. The data to be transmitted / received is the unique ID of the CPU provided in the main control circuit, the unique ID of the CPU provided in the payout control circuit, the game machine manufacturer code stored in the game machine, the manufacturer code of the security chip, the game Information such as the machine model code. Then, when one of the gaming machine and the gaming medium management device is the transmission source and the other is the transmission destination, when the transmission source transmits the transmission signal, the transmission destination having received the transmission signal is the same signal as the transmission signal. The confirmation signal is transmitted to the transmission source, and the transmission source compares the transmission signal with the confirmation signal to determine whether they are the same or not.

  As described above, by comparing the confirmation signal transmitted from the transmission destination with the transmission signal at the transmission source and determining whether they are the same, the signal transmitted from the transmission source is not falsified, It can be confirmed that it has been sent to the sender. In this way, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsifying transmission / reception signals between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device.

  Further, in the gaming system, the transmission source has a modulation unit that modulates a signal, transmits the signal modulated by the modulation unit as the transmission signal, and the transmission destination is the signal modulated by the modulation unit. It is possible to have a demodulation unit that demodulates.

  Thus, even if the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device is read, it is difficult to decipher this signal, and the transmission / reception signal between the gaming machine and the gaming media management device is It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as falsification.

  Further, in the gaming system, when the transmission destination receives the transmission signal from the transmission source, the transmission destination receives an approval signal indicating that the transmission signal has been received, separately from the confirmation signal. It may be transmitted to the transmission source.

  Thus, by comparing the transmission signal with the confirmation signal, not only confirmation that the transmission and reception of the normal signal has been performed but also confirmation that the transmission and reception of the normal signal has been performed based on the approval signal It is possible to further strengthen the control of fraud since it is possible.

[9. Appendix]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the embodiment described above, the following gaming machines can be provided.

9-1. 1st to 8th game machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in the starting opening, a lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the big hit game is over when the above big hit is a certainty big hit, it is controlled to the high probability gaming state.

  As this type of game machine, the game setting value in which the state of the game element (structural element or control element) affecting the ball entering rate to the ball entrance and the ball withdrawal tendency is inputted in advance by a predetermined setting input means The pachinko game machine set to the state corresponding to is disclosed (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency of each game stand, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as gaming nails and features. Even if it is, it can prevent equalization | homogenization of the payout tendency for every game arcade or every game stand.

(First issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in JP-A-2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency for each game stand, a structural element that influences the ball entry rate to the ball entrance and the withdrawal tendency. Alternatively, the state of the control element can be changed according to the set value, and the degree of contribution to the improvement of the game entertainment can not necessarily be large.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest. is there.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a first gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-1. 1st game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118);
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) in which variation display of symbols (for example, special symbols) is performed in a predetermined variation pattern over a predetermined variation time;
Variation pattern determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S78) that determines the variation pattern performed in the display unit based on the result of the lottery;
Variation pattern table storage means (for example, main ROM 102) for storing a variation pattern table to be used for determination of the variation pattern;
A symbol display control means (for performing variation display of the symbol (for example, a variation display of a special symbol) over a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means, and stopping and displaying in a manner indicating the result of the lottery For example, the main CPU 101) capable of executing the process of step S93;
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
A fluctuation pattern table (for example, a diagram shown in FIG. 6) is defined such that the probability that the fluctuation time is determined relatively to the short fluctuation pattern (for example, the normal fluctuation B) becomes higher as the setting value set by the setting change control means becomes higher. It is characterized in that it stores the special symbol variation time determination table shown in 12).

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, so the higher the set value, the more the number of times of drawing per unit time will increase. The degree of expectation is enhanced, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
While further comprising lottery number counting means (for example, main CPU 101) for counting the number of times of execution of the lottery from a specific time,
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
Another fluctuation pattern table (for example, FIG. 14) is defined such that the probability that the short fluctuation pattern is determined as the setting value set by the setting change control unit becomes higher than the fluctuation pattern table. It further stores the variation time determination table table for special symbols when the number of variations shown is 1001 or more,
The fluctuation pattern determination means
When the number of times of execution of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when a big hit lottery of 1001 or more special symbols is performed after the big hit gaming state is ended), The variation pattern may be determined using the other variation pattern table.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the number of times of lottery execution counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition, the fluctuation pattern can be determined using another fluctuation pattern table Therefore, the higher the setting value, the more the number of times of drawing per unit time becomes remarkable, and the number of times of executing the drawing is a specific number of times of execution. The “predetermined condition” corresponds to, for example, when a big hit lottery of a predetermined or more (for example, 1001 times or more) special symbol is performed after the big hit gaming state ends, but it is not limited thereto.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the variation display of the symbol is being performed, the lottery of the variation display of the symbol is performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls so that the game can not proceed even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a result;
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when variation display of symbols (for example, variation display of special symbols) is being performed, it is determined whether the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. There is something to be done. In this case, even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode indicating the result of the lottery for the variable display of the symbol, if it is determined that it is not suitable in the determination of the appropriate / not appropriate for the game information, It is configured not to progress the game. This makes it possible to secure security.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a second gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-2. Second game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118);
Display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 16) in which a symbol effect by a predetermined symbol (for example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol) is performed, and a result of the lottery can be indicated by a stop mode of the symbol;
Stop mode determination means (for example, sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S205) that determines the stop mode of the symbol that can be displayed on the display means based on the result of the lottery;
Stop mode table storage means (for example, program ROM 202) for storing a stop mode table (for example, the decorative symbol determination table of FIG. 4) to be used for determining the stop mode of the symbol by the stop mode determining means;
Symbol effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201 capable of executing the process of step S207) that controls the symbol to be stopped in the stop mode determined by the stop mode determination means;
When the symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, a first mode, a second mode, a specific mode) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit), a plurality of profits advantageous to the player Profit giving means (for example, the main CPU 101 for executing the big hit game control of FIG. 9) for giving any one of the benefits (for example, 4R normal big hit, 4R certain variation big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R certain variation big hit);
Equipped with
The profit giving means is
When the symbol is displayed in a stop mode indicating that the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), and the stop mode is a specific stop mode (for example, a specific mode), the plurality of profits Among them, it is possible to give a specific benefit (for example, a 10R probability variation big hit) with a relatively high degree of advantage
The stopping mode determining means is
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode is higher as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher. It is characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine the stop mode of the symbol so as to be enhanced.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher, the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode having a relatively high advantage among the plurality of benefits. It is possible to increase the probability of the game and to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The stopping mode determining means is
When the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting value set by the setting change control means even though the probability that the specific profit is provided is the same regardless of the setting value. It is characterized in that the stop mode of the symbol can be determined so that the probability that the stop mode of the symbol is stopped in the specific stop mode can be increased as the value of T increases.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), when the result of the lottery is the specific result (for example, a big hit), the setting change is made while the probability that the specific profit is given regardless of the setting is the same. As the set value set by the control means becomes higher, the probability of being stopped in the specific stop mode is increased, so that it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the symbol effect is being performed, the result of the lottery is the result of the specific Even if it is decided by the stop mode determination means that the stop mode of the symbol is to be stopped in the specific stop mode, game control means (for example, the process of step S722 is executed to control the game not to progress) Main CPU 101), and
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the symbol effect (for example, the change effect of the decorative symbol) is being performed, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined. Sometimes. In this case, even if the result of the lottery is a specific result and it is determined that the stop mode of the symbol is to be stopped in the specific stop mode, it is unsuitable in the determination of appropriateness or inappropriateness about the game information If it is determined that the game is to be played, the game can not be progressed. This makes it possible to secure security.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a third gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-3. Third game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means capable of executing lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83 and step S118, including both a big hit lottery and a main symbol determination lottery);
Lottery table storage means for storing a lottery table (for example, a table showing the selection rate of the main symbol when the result of the big hit determination of the special symbol in FIG. 15 or 16 is a big hit) used for the lottery;
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display section 73, the second special symbol display section 74) in which at least variation display of symbols is performed;
Symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that displays the variation of the symbol and stops and displays it in a mode indicating the result of the lottery;
The symbol is displayed in a mode (for example, special figure 1-1 to special figure 1-8, special figure 2-1 to special figure 2-4) indicating that the result of the lottery is a specific result (for example, a big hit). When displayed, the profit giving means (for example, FIG. 9) which gives any one of a plurality of benefits advantageous to the player (for example, 4R regular big hit, 4R positive variation big hit, 10R normal big hit, 10R positive variation big hit). The main CPU 101) which executes the big hit game control,
Equipped with
The lottery table storage means is
Among the plurality of profits, a plurality of lottery tables are stored, in which the drawing probability for a specific profit (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) having a relatively high degree of advantage is different according to the set value,
The lottery means is
The lottery may be performed using a lottery table corresponding to the setting value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), since the lottery is performed using a plurality of lottery tables in which the lottery probability for the specific profit having a relatively high degree of advantage is different according to the set value, the setting change control means sets It is possible to make the degree of profit given to the player different in accordance with the set value which has been set, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The profit giving means is
At least a special gaming state advantageous to the player and a high probability gaming state in which the profit is provided with a relatively high probability as the specific profit, and a gaming state after the special gaming state is over And
The lottery table storage means is
A plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the high probability gaming state is different according to the set value are stored.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), since the probability of being controlled to the high probability gaming state varies depending on the setting value, it is possible to improve the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The profit giving means is
As the specific benefit, a specific gaming state (for example, a time saving gaming state) in which the lottery is promoted is further awarded,
The lottery table storage means is
A plurality of tables in which the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state is different according to the set value are stored.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), since the probability of being controlled to the specific gaming state varies depending on the set value, it is possible to improve the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
When the variation display of the symbol is performed, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is not suitable by the appropriateness determination unit, the lottery of the variation display of the symbol is performed. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S 722) that controls the game not to progress even if the result is the result of giving the specific profit.
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability of the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the lottery concerning the variable display of the symbol is the result of giving the specific profit, the game can not be progressed. This makes it possible to secure security.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fourth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-4. 4th game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of starting openings including a first starting opening and a second starting opening provided in the game area;
Special lottery means (for example, step S73, step S83, step S118 can be executed special lottery means for performing a special lottery in a different lottery mode based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game balls into each of the plurality of starting openings CPU 101),
Special game execution means (for example, the main CPU 101 for executing the big hit game control of FIG. 9) capable of executing a special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
Specific game execution means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of executing a specific game having a lower degree of advantage than the special game based on the result of the special lottery being a specific result (for example, a small hit);
Equipped with
The special lottery means is
When the special lottery is performed based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening, the probability that the specific lottery results in the special lottery corresponds to the setting value set by the setting change control means Can be done differently, and
The specific game execution means is
Regardless of the setting value set by the setting change control means, the frequency when the game ball enters the second starting opening is higher than when the game ball enters the first starting opening at a higher frequency. It is characterized in that the specific game can be executed.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability of the specific result may be different according to the set value set by the setting change control means, and regardless of the set value set by the setting change control means The specific game is executed at a higher frequency when the game ball enters the second start-up port than when the game ball enters the first start-up port. That is, on the premise that the specific game is executed with high frequency when the game ball is made to win in the second starting opening, it becomes possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value, It will be possible to improve the interest.

  Note that "the specific game can be executed with a higher frequency when the game ball enters the second start opening than when the game ball enters the first start opening" is the first When the game ball enters the starting opening of the game ball has entered the second starting opening the probability that the specific result will be a specific result in the final determination of the specific result decision (including the probability 0) Not only the mode lower than time but also the mode which does not perform the drop determination situation about a specific result, when a game ball enters into the 1st starting opening.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
A normal start opening (for example, passing gate 49) provided in the game area;
Normal lottery means (for example, main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 9) for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of the gaming ball into the normal starting opening;
Starting variable control means (for example, for example, capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the gaming ball into the starting opening based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, normally hit) , And the main CPU 101),
The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first starting opening (first starting opening 420), and the gaming ball to the second starting opening (first starting opening 440) Special symbol variation display control means (for example, main CPU 101) for performing variation display of the second special symbol based on the entry, and
The first gaming state (for example, both the probability change flag and the time saving flag are set to OFF) such that the time (for example, the average time of 1000 seconds) of the variable display of the second special symbol affects the progress of the game Second game state (for example, the second game state (for example, the average time 1 sec) is shorter than the time of the variable display of the first special symbol (for example, the average time 10 sec) Gaming state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous gaming state in which the probability change flag is set to ON and the time saving flag is set to OFF;
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), in the second gaming state, since the variation display of the second special symbol is shorter than the time of the variation display of the first special symbol, the specific game is executed with high frequency It becomes possible to make the execution frequency of the specific game different according to the set value without increasing the execution frequency of the normal lottery.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
The game information stored in the game information storage means by the appropriateness determination means is not suitable before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered at the start up opening (for example, the second start up opening) If the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) is determined to be the specific result, the specific game execution means can not advance the game without executing the specific game. Game control means (eg, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722)
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of (3), even if the gaming ball enters the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening), a special lottery (for example, Before or after the result of the second special lottery is indicated (for example, during the change display of the special symbol), the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery (for example, the second special lottery) performed based on the entry of the gaming ball to the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening) is a specific result (for example, a small hit) Even if it is determined that the game information is determined to be inappropriate in the determination of the appropriateness / inappropriateness of the game information, the game can not be progressed before the specific game (for example, the small hit game) is executed. This makes it possible to secure security.

  In order to solve the first problem, the present invention provides a fifth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-5. Fifth game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A starting opening provided in the game area,
Special lottery means for performing a special lottery based on the entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball into the starting opening;
First special game execution means capable of executing a first special game that operates based on the result of the special lottery being a special result (for example, a big hit);
A normal start opening (for example, passing gate 49) provided in the game area;
Normal lottery means (for example, main CPU 101 for performing a normal hit determination in the normal game of FIG. 9) for performing a normal lottery based on the entry (for example, passage) of the gaming ball into the normal starting opening;
Starting variable control means (for example, for example, capable of facilitating the entry (for example, acceptance) of the gaming ball into the starting opening based on the result of the normal lottery being a predetermined result (for example, normally hit) , And the main CPU 101),
Within a specific area where a specific opening is provided based on the result of the special lottery performed on the basis (for example, acceptance) of the game ball entering the starting opening being a specific result (for example, a small hit) Specific area variable control means (e.g., main CPU 101) capable of operating a predetermined movable piece so as to facilitate the entry (e.g., acceptance) of the gaming ball into the vehicle;
Second special game execution means capable of executing a second special game that operates based on the reception of the game ball in the specific port provided in the specific area;
Equipped with
The specific area variable control means
It is possible to operate the predetermined movable piece so that the ease of entering the gaming ball into the specific area may be different according to the set value set by the setting change control means. It features.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability that a specific result is obtained can be made to differ depending on the set value set by the setting change control means, so that the predetermined value is set according to the set value set. It is possible to make the operation frequency of the movable piece different, and to make the opportunity to receive a benefit different according to the set value set, thus making it possible to improve the fun of the game.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific region variable control means is
The ease of entry (for example, acceptance) of the game ball to the starting opening is made different according to the set value set by the setting change control means (for example, the probability of the normal hit is made different, of the ordinary symbol) By setting the execution frequency of the special lottery to be different according to the set value set, the ease of entering the gaming ball into the specific area is set by the set value. It is characterized in that it is performed depending on the situation.

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine (2), the ease of entering the gaming ball into the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening 440) may be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of benefits provided based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area will differ depending on the set value set, making it possible to improve the game interest.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The operation of the predetermined movable piece by the specific region variable control means is
Ease of entering the gaming ball into the specific area by making the probability of the specific result (for example, a small hit) in the special lottery different according to the set value set by the setting change control means Are set so as to be different depending on the set value.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the ease of entering the gaming ball into the starting opening (for example, the second starting opening 440) may be different depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. Since the lottery is performed, the amount of the benefit provided based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area will differ according to the set value set, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above,
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Display means for displaying the result of the special lottery (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74);
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means before the result of the special lottery is displayed although the game ball has entered the start opening. Even if the result of the special lottery is a specific result, the game control means (for example, the process of step S 722) that controls so that the game can not proceed without activating the predetermined movable piece by the specific area variable control means The main CPU 101) to execute
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (4), even if the gaming ball enters the starting opening, the result of the special lottery performed based on the entering of the gaming ball into the starting opening is indicated (for example, the special symbol During the variable display of, it may be determined whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or inappropriate. In this case, even if the result of the special lottery performed based on the entry of the game ball into the starting opening is a specific result, it is determined that the determination of the appropriateness or inappropriateness of the game information is not appropriate. Is configured such that the game can not proceed before the predetermined movable piece is activated. This makes it possible to secure security.

  In order to solve the above first problem, the present invention provides a sixth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-6. Sixth game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118);
The special game state control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 9) which can be controlled to the special game state (for example, big hit game state) based on the result of the lottery being the special result (for example, big hit) With the main CPU 101),
A game state control means (eg, step S169) that can control the game state after the special game state is ended to an advantageous game state (eg, high probability game state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (eg, step S169) With the main CPU 101) to proceed with the game after setting the flag,
After being controlled to the special gaming state, counting means (for example, main) that counts the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated (for example, the number of loops) without being controlled to the normal gaming state CPU 101),
Equipped with
The gaming state control means
Even when the result of the lottery in the advantageous gaming state is the special result, the special gaming state is configured to be controllable.
When the number of times counted by the counting means reaches a prescribed number, the gaming state after the end of the special gaming state is controlled to the normal gaming state,
The prescribed number of times is
It is characterized in that it can be different according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of (1), it is possible to repeat the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state up to the prescribed number of times, and the prescribed number of times differs depending on the set value set by the setting change control means. It becomes possible to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The system further comprises a specified number of times determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the number of times of lottery of the limiter) that determines the specified number of times by lottery.
The specified number of times determining means
A lottery for determining the prescribed number of times is configured to be performed so that an expected value for the prescribed number of times differs according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of (2), the specified number of times the special game state and the advantageous game state can be repeated is determined by lottery, and the expected value for the specified number is set by the setting change control means. It is possible to improve the game interest because it differs depending on the situation.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means, the count means may be counted even if the number counted by the count means is less than the specified number. Game control means for controlling so that the game can not progress without the number of times counted by the game reaching the specified number (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722);
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when the number of times the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state are repeated (i.e., the number of loops) without being controlled to the normal gaming state (i.e., the number of loops) In some cases, the suitability of the game information stored in the game information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if it is in the loop, if it is determined that it is not appropriate in the determination of appropriateness or inappropriateness about the game information, it is configured not to progress the game without the number of loops reaching the specified number There is. This makes it possible to secure security.

  In order to solve the above first problem, the present invention provides a seventh gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-7. Seventh Game Machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Lottery means (eg, main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 440) ,
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 9) which can control progress of a game including controlling to a special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, big hit) The main CPU 101) to execute
Effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201 (display control circuit 204)) capable of at least executing an opening effect to be performed at the start of the special game state and an ending effect to be performed at the end of the special game state;
Equipped with
The lottery means is
The lottery is performed in a mode in which the degree of advantage is higher as the setting value set by the setting change control means is higher.
The effect control means is
The opening effect and the ending effect are performed so that the higher the set value set by the setting change control means, the longer the at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect. It is characterized in that it is configured to

  According to the gaming machine of (1), while the lottery is performed in a mode in which the degree of advantage is higher as the set value is higher, at least one of the time required for the opening effect and the time required for the ending effect May be longer as the set value set is higher. Therefore, in the high setting, it is possible to suppress the prize balls paid out in unit time while aiming to improve the game interest.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variation display of symbols based on the result of the lottery;
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
And further
The lottery means is
Regardless of whether or not the special gaming state is being controlled, random numbers can be extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting opening,
The appropriateness determination means
Even when being controlled to the special gaming state, it is configured to be able to determine the appropriateness or inappropriateness of the game information,
The game control means
If it is determined by the appropriateness determination means that the game information stored in the game information storage means is inappropriate, game progress is not permitted, which prevents the game from proceeding even if the special game state is being controlled. A unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S722) is characterized.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, determination of appropriateness or inappropriateness about gaming information may be executed even when it is controlled to the special gaming state. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is not suitable, the game can not proceed even if it is controlled to the special game state, so security is secured. While, it becomes possible to aim at the improvement of game interest.

  In order to solve the above first problem, the present invention provides an eighth gaming machine having the following configuration.

[9-1-8. Eighth game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of entrances having at least a first entrance (e.g., a continuously operating left gate 1100) and a second entrance (e.g., a continuously operating right gate 1110);
Entry permitting means (for example, distribution device 1120) configured to allow a game ball to enter any of the plurality of entrances;
Different benefits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance (for example, different numbers of rounds, if there is a starting opening below the entrance, there is a lottery Profit giving means capable of giving the player whether or not to be executed etc. (for example, the main CPU 101 executing the big hit game control of FIG. 9);
Equipped with
The entry permitting means is
Among the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball can be varied according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Do.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the profit to be provided to the player may differ between when the gaming ball enters the first entrance and when the gaming ball enters the second entrance Of the first entrance and the second entrance, the ease of entry of the game ball can be varied according to the set value set by the setting change control means. Moreover, since the player can aim at which of the first entrance and the second entrance the game ball enters, the state of the game element according to the setting while improving the game interest Can be suitably changed.

  Note that “it is possible to provide the player with different benefits when the game ball enters the first entrance and when the game ball enters the second entrance” is, for example, a game performed at the first entrance Other than when the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state differs depending on when the ball enters and the game ball enters the second entrance, one entrance is a starting opening that is a drawing opportunity, and the other entrance is a drawing This corresponds to the case where a general winning opening is not triggered.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Starting openings (for example, first starting opening 5442, second starting opening 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) for performing a lottery based on the game ball being accepted in the starting opening;
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) in which the variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery;
Game information related to the progress of the game including information of the setting value set by the setting change control means (for example, the number of holding memories to be stored in the holding memory means, lottery results for holding memory and variable display, setting values) Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103)) capable of storing
Adequacy determining means (e.g., the main CPU 101 that performs the processes of step S72 and step S82) for determining whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means, the player is notified to the player even if the game ball enters the first entrance or the second entrance. Game control means (for example, main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls so that the game can not proceed without giving a profit;
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the game information is stored in the gaming information storage means, etc. when the game ball has entered the first entrance or the second entrance during the variable display of the symbol but the profit is not yet provided. It may be determined whether the game information being played is appropriate or not. In this case, if it is determined that the player is not appropriate in determining the appropriateness or inappropriateness of the game information despite the possibility that the player is given a benefit, the game proceeds without giving the player a benefit. It is configured to be impossible. This makes it possible to secure security.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2),
Entry validating means (for example, a main unit that activates a condition device) that validates the entry of gaming balls for at least the first entrance and the second entrance based on the result of the lottery being a special result CPU 101) further
The profit giving means is
When a gaming ball enters the first entrance, a predetermined benefit (for example, 8R big hit gaming state) can be provided to the player,
When the game ball enters the second entrance, it is characterized in that it is possible to give the player a specific profit (for example, a 16R jackpot gaming state) having a profit degree larger than the predetermined profit.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the player can play a game aiming at the second entrance where the specific profit with a higher profit may be given, and the game interest can be improved. It becomes.

  According to the first to eighth gaming machines of the present invention configured as described above, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the interest.

9-2. Ninth game machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in the starting opening, a lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the big hit game is over when the above big hit is a certainty big hit, it is controlled to the high probability gaming state.

  As this type of game machine, the game setting value in which the state of the game element (structural element or control element) affecting the ball entering rate to the ball entrance and the ball withdrawal tendency is inputted in advance by a predetermined setting input means The pachinko game machine set to the state corresponding to is disclosed (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency of each game stand, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as gaming nails and features. Even if it is, it can prevent equalization | homogenization of the payout tendency for every game arcade or every game stand.

(Second issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency for each game stand, an abnormality may occur in, for example, a game setting value, etc. Is hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving security.

  In order to solve the second problem, the present invention provides a ninth gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103))
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) for performing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, acceptance of gaming balls to the first start port 440);
Symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variation display of symbols based on the result of the lottery;
The appropriate determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the processes of step S72 and step S82) that determines appropriateness or inappropriateness of the game information at a predetermined timing (for example, the reception timing of the game ball to the first starting port 440) ,
Assuming that the variation display of the symbol is being performed when the variation display of the symbol is being performed and if the game information stored in the game information is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means Game control means (for example, main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls so that the game can not proceed too
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), determination of appropriateness or inappropriateness of the game information may be performed when the variable display of the symbol is performed. In such a case, if it is determined that the game information stored in the game information storage means is not suitable, the progress of the game is not permitted even if the variable display of the symbol is being performed, so security It is possible to improve.

  According to the ninth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while improving the security.

9-3. Tenth gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in the starting opening, a lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the big hit game is over when the above big hit is a certainty big hit, it is controlled to the high probability gaming state.

  As this type of game machine, the game setting value in which the state of the game element (structural element or control element) affecting the ball entering rate to the ball entrance and the ball withdrawal tendency is inputted in advance by a predetermined setting input means The pachinko game machine set to the state corresponding to is disclosed (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency of each game stand, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as gaming nails and features. Even if it is, it can prevent equalization | homogenization of the payout tendency for every game arcade or every game stand.

(Third task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency for each game console, changing the withdrawal tendency according to the setting value does not necessarily mean that the design load is light. It is hard to say.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the state of a gaming element according to setting while reducing design load. It is in.

  In order to solve the third problem, the present invention provides a tenth gaming machine having the following configuration.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Random number generation means for generating random numbers with a predetermined width (for example, main CPU 101 for generating random number values by executing a program);
Random number extraction means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S73) that extracts random numbers based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Table storage means (for example, the main RAM 103) for storing a lottery table (for example, the big hit random number determination table) that defines total random numbers (for example, the range of big hit determination random numbers) and specific random numbers (for example, big hit determination value data) ,
The lottery is performed using the random number extracted by the random number extraction means, and the special game state is controlled when the extracted random number is a specific random number (for example, big hit judgment value data) Possible special game state control means,
Equipped with
The table storage means is
A lottery table in which the number of total random numbers differs at least according to the setting value set by the setting change control means is stored,
The random number generation means is
A total random number of the number defined in the lottery table is generated according to the set value set by the setting change control means.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the probability of being controlled to the special gaming state by changing the denominator (the range of the jackpot determination random number) having more digits than the numerator (the number of jackpot determination value data) In order to change the jackpot probability), it is possible to set the jackpot probability for each setting value in detail compared to the method of changing the number of jackpot judgment value data according to the setting value by setting the range of the jackpot judgment random number as a fixed value. It becomes possible.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
Symbol variation display control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S93) that performs variation display of symbols based on the result of the lottery;
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
When random numbers are extracted based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the appropriate determination means (step for determining whether the total random numbers generated by the random number generation means are appropriate or not) until the variable display of the symbol is started The main CPU 101 performing the process of step S72 and step S82,
Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 for executing the process of step S722) that controls so that the game can not proceed when the total random number generated by the random number generation means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means;
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when it is determined that the total random number generated by the random number generation means is not suitable, the game can not be progressed, so security can be ensured while the setting value is maintained. It becomes possible to set each big hit probability finely.

  According to the tenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to suitably change the state of the gaming element according to the setting while reducing the design load.

9-4. 11th and 12th game machines]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in the starting opening, a lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the big hit game is over when the above big hit is a certainty big hit, it is controlled to the high probability gaming state.

  As this type of game machine, the game setting value in which the state of the game element (structural element or control element) affecting the ball entering rate to the ball entrance and the ball withdrawal tendency is inputted in advance by a predetermined setting input means The pachinko game machine set to the state corresponding to is disclosed (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency of each game stand, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as gaming nails and features. Even if it is, it can prevent equalization | homogenization of the payout tendency for every game arcade or every game stand.

(Fourth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency for each game stand, while for the player, being able to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency becomes a skepticism. , There is a risk that interest will decline.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably suppressing a decrease in interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting. It is.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides an eleventh game machine having the following configuration.

[9-4-1. Eleventh game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
A plurality of winning openings (for example, the first starting opening 5442, the second starting opening 440, and the general winning openings 53 to 56) provided in the game area and including the starting opening;
Privilege giving means (for example, the payout device 350) for giving a privilege (for example, a prize ball) based on the game ball being accepted in any of the plurality of winning openings;
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) capable of executing a lottery based on the game ball being accepted in the starting opening;
Display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) on which at least a variation effect of a symbol performed based on a result of the lottery is performed;
When the fluctuation effect of the symbol is being performed in a specific mode (for example, reach effect) indicating that the result of the lottery may be a specific result, a specific winning opening among the plurality of winning openings Setting suggestion means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting setting value information on the setting value set by the setting change control means based on the fact that the game ball has been accepted;
It is characterized by

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the setting change control is performed based on the fact that the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening when the variation effect of the symbol is performed in the specific mode (for example, reach effect). Since the set value information on the set value set by the means may be suggested, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player becoming suspicious. In addition, when the fluctuation production of the symbol is performed in the specific mode, there is a possibility that the player may stop the firing of the game ball, but such a thing can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The system further comprises a specified number of times determination unit (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the number of times of lottery of the limiter) that determines the specified number of times by lottery.
Specific mode determination means (for example, main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S78) for determining whether or not to perform the fluctuation effect of the symbol in the specific mode (for example, reach effect);
A specific winning opening determining means for randomly determining any one of the plurality of winning openings as the specific winning opening when it is determined by the specific mode determining means to perform the fluctuation effect of the symbol in the specific mode. (For example, the main CPU 101),
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the specific winning combination is randomly determined not to be the fixed winning combination but to any of the plurality of winning combinations, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game. In addition, it is preferable to conceal the specific winning combination determined randomly, without disclosing it. As a result, the player has an interest in selecting which winning opening to aim at.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2),
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means, the setting change control means sets the game ball even if the game ball is accepted in the specific winning opening. Game control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S722) that controls so that the game can not proceed without suggesting set value information on the set value that has been set;
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (3), the gaming information storage is performed when the variation effect of the symbol is performed or when the gaming ball is accepted to the specific winning opening but the setting value information is not suggested yet The suitability of the game information stored in the means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that the set value information may be suggested, if it is determined that the set information is not suitable in the determination of appropriateness or inappropriateness regarding the game information, the set value set by the setting change control means The game can not proceed without suggesting set value information of This makes it possible to secure security.

  In order to solve the fourth problem, the present invention provides a twelfth game machine having the following configuration.

9-4-2. Twelfth game machine]
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Starting openings (for example, first starting opening 5442, second starting opening 440) provided in the game area;
Lottery means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the processes of step S73, step S83, and step S118) for performing a lottery based on the game ball being accepted in the starting opening;
Display means (for example, the first special symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74) in which the variable display of symbols is performed based on the result of the lottery;
The game control means (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 9) which can control progress of a game including controlling to a special game state based on the result of the lottery being a special result (for example, big hit) The main CPU 101) to execute
The setting of the setting value set by the setting change control means on the basis of satisfying a predetermined condition (for example, that the overflow point has reached a predetermined point, etc.) relating to the reception of the game ball to the starting opening Setting suggestion means (eg, sub CPU 201) capable of suggesting value information;
And the like.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the present setting value (the setting value set by the setting change control means) is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition concerning the reception of the game ball to the starting opening. Since the set value information can be suggested, it is possible to reduce the player from becoming suspicious. In addition, execution of the game is prompted so that the game ball can be received in the starting opening. It should be noted that "having satisfied the predetermined condition for receiving the game ball in the starting opening" means, for example, that the game ball has been received in the starting opening and is therefore a holding upper limit because it is a holding upper limit If there is no game ball, or if the game ball has not been held due to the fact that the game ball has been accepted in the start-up opening, it is assumed that the point has reached a predetermined point by accumulating points when it is not held due But not limited to these.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The game information (for example, the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means, the lottery results for pending storage and variable display, setting values) relating to the progress of the game including the setting values set by the setting change control means Possible game information storage means (for example, RWM (main RAM 103));
Adequacy judging means (main CPU 101 that carries out the processing of step S72 and step S82) for judging whether the game information stored in the game information storage means is appropriate or not at a predetermined timing;
And further
The game control means
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means, there is a possibility that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game ball is received in the start opening ( For example, a game progress disapproval means (for example, a game progress non-permission means) which controls the game not to proceed without suggesting setting value information on the setting value set by the setting change control means even if the overflow point has reached a predetermined point) , And the main CPU 101) that executes the processing of step S722.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), when the variable display of the symbol is performed, the suitability of the gaming information stored in the gaming information storage means may be determined. In this case, even if there is a possibility that a predetermined condition will be satisfied when the game ball is received in the starting opening, it is determined whether the game information is accepted or not received in the starting opening. When it is determined that the game is not suitable, the game can not be advanced without suggesting set value information on the set value set by the setting change control means. This makes it possible to secure security.

  According to the eleventh gaming machine and the twelfth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress the decrease in interest while changing the state of the gaming element according to the setting.

9-5. 13th game machine]

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in the starting opening, a lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started, and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the big hit game is over when the above big hit is a certainty big hit, it is controlled to the high probability gaming state.

  As this type of game machine, the game setting value in which the state of the game element (structural element or control element) affecting the ball entering rate to the ball entrance and the ball withdrawal tendency is inputted in advance by a predetermined setting input means The pachinko game machine set to the state corresponding to is disclosed (for example, refer Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-065977).

  According to such a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency of each game stand, so that it is not possible to adjust or maintain the configuration of the gaming board such as gaming nails and features. Even if it is, it can prevent equalization | homogenization of the payout tendency for every game arcade or every game stand.

(Fifth issue)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-065977, although it is possible to arbitrarily set the withdrawal tendency of each game stand, there is a possibility that the withdrawal management may not be easy.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine which can easily carry out deposit management.

  In order to solve the fifth problem, the present invention provides a thirteenth game machine having the following configuration.

(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined operation (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 with the setting key 328 turned on when the power is not turned on), data relating to the progress of the game is Setting change control means (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of different set values (for example, six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6);
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progress of the game based on the setting value set by the setting change control means;
Payout means (eg, payout device 350) for paying out gaming media based on winnings as a result of gaming;
Special game execution means (for example, special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which the frequency of the winning is increased, based on the fact that the result of the lottery performed based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is a specific result (for example, big hit) The main CPU 101) which executes the big hit game control of FIG. 9;
Data aggregating means capable of aggregating data relating to game media paid out by the payout means (for example, payout / fire control circuit 300);
Data display control means (main CPU 101) for displaying data aggregated by the data aggregation means in a predetermined display area (performance display monitor 334);
Equipped with
The data aggregation means
All history tabulating means for tabulating the data based on the entire game history;
It has a history aggregation means for each setting value that aggregates the data based on the game history for each setting value,
The data display control means
A game machine characterized by being capable of displaying data aggregated by the all history aggregation means and / or data aggregated by the set value classified history aggregation means.
It is characterized by

  According to the above-mentioned gaming machine (1), it is possible to display either or both of the data collected by all the history collecting means and the data collected by the setting value classified history collecting means. It becomes possible to easily carry out ball management.

According to the thirteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above-described configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of easily performing payout management.

9-6. Fourteenth gaming machine]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is won in the starting opening, a lottery is performed, and an effect image is displayed on, for example, a liquid crystal display based on the result of the lottery. If the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game is started and the big winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. After the big hit game is over when the above big hit is a certainty big hit, it is controlled to the high probability gaming state.

  As a game machine of this type, a game machine capable of changing specifications has been disclosed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833).

  According to such a gaming machine described in JP-A-2011-010833, it is possible to easily change the specs of the gaming machine, and therefore, it is possible to replace the storage means storing the effect data necessary to execute the effect. Is unnecessary and waste can be eliminated.

(The sixth task)
However, according to the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-010833, although it is possible to eliminate waste, there is a possibility that the game is lacking in interest only by changing the specifications.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to solve the sixth problem, the present invention provides a fourteenth game machine having the following configuration.
(1) A gaming machine according to the present invention,
Based on a predetermined value (for example, pressing the backup clear switch 330 and turning on the power switch 35 in a state where the setting key 328 is turned on when the power is not turned on), the game characteristic is set according to the setting value. A setting change control unit (for example, the main CPU 101 capable of executing the process of step S24) that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values of setting 1 to setting 6) having different values;
Game control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling the progression of the game in the game nature based on the setting value set by the setting change control means;
Equipped with
The game control means
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery (for example, the process of step S73, step S83, step S118) based on the game property according to the setting value set by the setting change control means;
Special game execution means capable of executing a special game (for example, the big hit game control of FIG. 9) to which a privilege according to the setting value set by the setting change control means is provided based on the result of the lottery;
It is characterized by having at least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (1), it is possible to execute a game with different game characteristics on one gaming machine based on the setting value set by the setting change control means, and the gaming machine manager or the like It becomes possible to give a wide range of ways to use the gaming machine.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1),
The game control means
In the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, when the first set value is set among the plurality of set values, the high probability state does not win the lottery within a predetermined period. A first game control unit (for example, the main CPU 101) for executing a game under the game characteristic (for example, ST specification) for ending the
In the high probability state in which the lottery is performed with a relatively high probability, when the second set value is set among the plurality of set values, the high probability state does not end until the lottery is won. A second game control player (for example, main CPU 101) that executes a game under continuous game characteristics (for example, a probability change loop specification);
It is characterized by having at least.

  According to the gaming machine of the above (2), although both the game nature by the first game control means and the game nature by the second game control means are commonly controlled to the high probability gaming state, the first game control means The high probability gaming state may end halfway without continuing to the next big hit gaming state in the game nature by the, the high probability gaming state is controlled to the next special gaming state in the game nature by the second game control means It differs greatly in the point which is continued and executed. As described above, by switching between and executing two substantially different game features that are similar at first glance, it is possible to broaden the way in which the pachinko gaming machine is used by the person in charge of managing the gaming machine, etc. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest.

  According to the fourteenth gaming machine of the present invention having the above configuration, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In the present embodiment, the embodiment in the case of being applied to a pachinko gaming machine has been described, but all the inventions described in this specification can be pachinko machines, gaming machines, and slots without departing from the scope of the invention. The present invention can be applied to all machines and machines.

16 Liquid Crystal Display 101 Main CPU
103 RWM (main RAM)
201 sub CPU

Claims (3)

Setting change control means capable of setting one of a plurality of different set values of data relating to the progress of a game based on a predetermined operation;
Lottery means capable of executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition;
Display means for performing variable display of symbols in a predetermined fluctuation pattern over a predetermined fluctuation time;
Variation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern to be performed in the display means based on the result of the lottery;
Variation pattern table storage means for storing a variation pattern table to be provided for determination of the variation pattern;
Symbol display control means for performing fluctuation display of the symbol over a fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the fluctuation pattern determination means, and stopping and displaying the result of the lottery;
Equipped with
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
A variation pattern table is stored which is defined such that the probability that the variation time is relatively determined to be a short variation pattern becomes higher as the set value set by the setting change control means becomes higher. Gaming machine. While further comprising lottery number counting means for counting the number of times of execution of the lottery from a specific time,
The fluctuation pattern table storage means
It further stores another fluctuation pattern table which is defined such that the probability that the short fluctuation pattern is determined as the setting value set by the setting change control means becomes higher than the fluctuation pattern table. ,
The fluctuation pattern determination means
The game is characterized in that the fluctuation pattern can be determined using the other fluctuation pattern table when the number of times of execution of the lottery counted by the lottery number counting means satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine. Game information storage means capable of storing game information relating to the progress of the game including the setting value set by the setting change control means;
Appropriateness determination means for determining appropriateness or inappropriateness of the game information stored in the game information storage means at a predetermined timing;
If the game information stored in the game information storage means is determined to be unsuitable by the appropriateness determination means while the variation display of the symbol is being performed, the lottery of the variation display of the symbol is performed. Game control means for controlling the game not to progress even if the symbol is not stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a result;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, comprising:

Images